Ford - Escape 4wd - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Escape 4wd Engine and year L4-2.5L (2010) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 25 Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 29 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 30 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 31 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 32 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 33 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 34 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 35 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 38 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 39 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen. 3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Audio Systems With Navigation 1. Turn the ACM on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 40 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 41 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) Without Navigation With Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 42 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 6. Remove the ACM. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 43 Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. 2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 67 Global Positioning System Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 68 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 69 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 70 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM). - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 79 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 85 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 99 Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 100 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 101 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 102 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 107 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 108 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 113 Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 116 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 117 Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 118 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 121 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 122 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 123 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 127 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 131 Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 132 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 137 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 138 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 139 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. Hybrid vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 140 2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 146 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 147 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 150 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 151 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 152 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 153 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 154 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 159 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 164 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 165 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 170 Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 174 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 175 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 194 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 195 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 199 Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 200 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 205 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 206 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 209 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 210 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 211 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 212 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 213 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 232 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 233 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 234 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 239 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 240 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 241 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 242 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 243 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 246 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 247 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 248 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 249 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 250 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 252 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 253 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 254 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 257 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 258 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 259 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Control Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 265 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming instructions, if necessary. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step clears DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This makes sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body (ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster (IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 269 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1) ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 270 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 271 APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 293 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 294 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 295 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 297 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 298 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 299 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 300 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 301 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 302 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 303 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 304 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 307 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 308 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 312 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 313 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 318 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 319 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 320 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 324 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 325 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 330 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 331 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 332 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 333 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 334 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs may set. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 335 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 336 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 337 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 341 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 346 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 353 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 354 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 355 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 361 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 362 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 367 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 368 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 375 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 376 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 377 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 378 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 379 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 380 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 381 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 382 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 383 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 386 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 387 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 388 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 389 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 390 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 391 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 392 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 393 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 394 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 395 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 396 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 397 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 398 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 399 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 400 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 401 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Sensor NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal 1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts. 2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the active park assist sensor(s). - Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System Check See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist. If the active park assist sensor does not respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 405 Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 406 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Switch Removal 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 412 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 415 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 416 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 417 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 418 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 419 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 420 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle - Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 424 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 425 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 426 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 427 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 428 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 429 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 435 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 436 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 437 Power Seat Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 438 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 439 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 440 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 444 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector. 3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 447 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 452 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 453 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 454 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 459 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 460 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 461 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 465 Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 466 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 470 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 471 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 476 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 477 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Angle Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws. 3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws. 5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 484 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 485 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 490 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 491 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 492 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 497 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 498 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 499 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 502 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 503 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 504 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 505 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 506 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 509 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 510 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 511 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 512 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 513 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 514 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 524 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 528 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 529 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 530 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 531 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 534 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 535 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 540 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 541 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 544 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch > Page 552 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 557 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 558 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 559 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 560 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 568 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 569 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 570 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 574 Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 575 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 576 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 580 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 581 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 584 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 588 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 592 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 596 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 597 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 601 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 609 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 610 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 615 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 618 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 619 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 620 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 621 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 625 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 626 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 627 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 633 Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 636 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 637 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 642 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 647 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 650 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 651 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 655 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 656 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 660 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 663 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 664 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 665 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 666 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 667 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 668 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 672 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 673 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 674 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 675 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 682 Interior Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 683 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 684 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 688 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 689 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 690 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 697 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 698 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 702 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 703 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 704 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 705 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 706 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure. Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 714 Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 719 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 720 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 723 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 724 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 725 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 726 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 734 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 738 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 739 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 740 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 741 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 742 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 743 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 744 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 745 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 746 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 750 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 751 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 752 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 753 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 756 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 757 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 762 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 763 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 764 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 765 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 769 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 770 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Typical In-tank FTP Sensor Typical In-line FTP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 774 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 775 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 776 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 777 Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 782 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 783 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 786 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 787 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 788 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 789 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 790 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 791 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 795 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 796 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 797 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor. Typical MAP Sensor Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 798 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 806 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 807 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 808 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 809 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 810 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 813 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 814 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 815 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical HO2S Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 818 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 821 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 822 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 827 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 831 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 836 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 840 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 841 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 842 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 843 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 844 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 845 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 846 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 851 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling. Typical VSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 856 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 861 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 862 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 866 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 867 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 868 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 869 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 870 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome light does not affect the FP module control. The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump. Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi) lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379 kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 875 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 882 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Typical IFS Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 885 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 890 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 896 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 897 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 900 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 901 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 902 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 903 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 907 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 908 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 909 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 910 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 911 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 912 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 913 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 914 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 915 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 925 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 931 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 932 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 937 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 938 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 941 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 942 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 943 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 944 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 945 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 946 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 951 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 956 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 957 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 958 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 959 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 960 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 961 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 962 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 963 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 964 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 967 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 968 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 969 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 970 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 971 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 972 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 975 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 976 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 981 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 984 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 991 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 994 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 995 from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 996 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 997 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 998 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 999 Removal NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1000 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1001 the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1002 Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1003 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1007 Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1008 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1015 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1016 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1019 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1020 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1030 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1036 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1037 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1044 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1050 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1051 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 1058 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1065 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1066 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1067 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1068 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1069 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1070 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1071 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 1076 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1077 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1078 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1081 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1082 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1083 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1084 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1085 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1086 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1087 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1097 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1098 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1099 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1102 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1103 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1104 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1105 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1106 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1107 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1110 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1111 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1112 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1113 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1115 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1121 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1122 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1123 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1124 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1125 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1129 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1134 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications NOTE: All alignment specifications are with the vehicle fuel tank full. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1140 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1141 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1144 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1145 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1146 Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1147 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1148 Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Wander Wheel Alignment Angles Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Wheel Alignment Angles Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Wheel Alignment Angles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 1149 Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Poor Groove Feel Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." - Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. - In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (LH side) 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (RH side) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1152 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position sensor calibration. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1153 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 2). 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 3). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1154 5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement 2). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement 3). 3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1155 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nut(s). 6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the inner tie rod is rotated. Rotate the inner tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1156 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Steering. Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. - Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Steering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1161 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1162 All vehicles 7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP module fuse. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams Air Filter Element: Diagrams Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................1-3-4-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1176 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1181 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1182 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................AYSF-32-YPC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1183 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1184 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1187 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - Hybrid The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of charge stays greater than 35%. 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and monitor the traction battery state of charge PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic mode can be activated. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows: - Apply the parking brake. - Place the gear selector in the PARK position. - Verify the key is in the OFF position. - NOTE: Do not crank the engine. Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF. - Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10 seconds. - Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position and fully apply the accelerator pedal. - Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds. - Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. 6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set DTC P2535. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the throttle plate will fail to open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1193 Crank the engine as follows: - Depress and hold the brake pedal. - Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal. - Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position. - Release the accelerator pedal. - Release the brake pedal. 7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode. 9. Clear all DTCs. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1194 If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1195 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Cylinder Leakage Detection When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause. The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center (TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted. Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive. While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Adjustments Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt. NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. 4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in). - exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in). The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: - intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in). - exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in). Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet thickness - nominal clearance. elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation location. 5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For additional information, refer to Valve Train Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Accessory Drive Belt Routing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Accessory Drive Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic transmissions. - WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: - if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. - the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak. - if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. - if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. - if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. - if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. - NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter > Page 1204 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: - Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. - With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. - Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. - Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1207 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley. - Remove the accessory drive belt from the engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams Air Filter Element: Diagrams Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1213 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1226 6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1227 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Removal and Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1228 4. Remove the evaporator-to-compressor suction line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Add the correct amount of clean electric A/C compressor oil to the refrigerant system. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1229 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1230 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1231 - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 8. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................. 7.4 Quarts ( 7.0 Liters ) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1243 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored) Ford Part Number - VC-7-B Ford Specification - WSS-M97B51-A1 Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1248 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transaxle ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 9 quarts (8.5 liters) NOTE: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1251 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the in-line filter. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter. 4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes. 5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick disconnect fitting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1254 6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick disconnect fitting. 7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1255 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3 times. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times. After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1256 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Exchange Transmission Fluid Exchange NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Use the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to change the fluid. 3. Connect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to the transmission fluid cooler tube after the transmission fluid cooler on the return tube. This will help remove any foreign material trapped in the transmission fluid coolers. 4. Perform the transmission fluid exchange using the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. 5. Once the transmission fluid exchange is completed, disconnect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Reconnect any disconnected transmission fluid cooler tubes. 6. Using the scan tool with the engine running, check and make sure that the transmission is at normal operating temperature 66-77°C (150-170°F). Check and adjust the transmission fluid level and check for any leaks. If transmission fluid is needed, add transmission fluid in increments of 0.24L (0.5 pt) until the correct level is achieved. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. 5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 6. NOTE: After the transmission fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant to the threads. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. NOTICE: Use only clean transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 8. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug, removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1260 Install the fill plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 9. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transaxle ................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 2.4 quarts (2.3 liters) NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1265 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number - XT-4-QGL Ford Specification - WSS-M2C203-A1 and GL-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1266 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. 5. Fill the transmission with gear oil through the fill level inspection plug hole, until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 6. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Axle Fluid Capacity Rear Axle ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L ) Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1271 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ........................................... 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1276 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (4X4) Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant. Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 5.0 Liters (5.3 Qt) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1281 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)* Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark *Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity................................. ..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1286 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity................................. ..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1287 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Identification Testing Refrigerant Identification 1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system. Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following: - If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital display. - If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display. - If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light, "Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will also be displayed on the digital display. 3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt the user if an air purge is desired. 4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the refrigerant is indeed contaminated. Contaminated Refrigerant Handling NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment. NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system flushing procedure. 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Flush the A/C system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant System Recovery NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1290 NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Identification Testing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once repairs are complete. 4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF the power supply. 5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment. 6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1291 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves. 2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the Vacuum Pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves. 4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1292 refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1293 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material/debris. These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The F8VZ-19E773-AB filter is intended for use on one vehicle only. All vehicles 1. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seal. 2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit (219-00074) are designed for low-pressure flushing and are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur. NOTE: Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating. Using the correct adapters and service hoses, install the pancake filter between the condenser and the condenser outlet fitting. 3. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1294 Non-hybrid vehicles 5. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Start the engine and allow it to idle briefly. Select A/C operation and set the blower speed to HI. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly. 6. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at 800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at 1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating. 7. Stop the engine. Hybrid vehicles 8. Start the vehicle and select A/C operation. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly. 9. Run the A/C system for one hour. All vehicles 10. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 11. Remove the pancake filter, hoses and adapters from the vehicle. 12. Install a new gasket seal and connect the condenser outlet fitting. 13. Install a new receiver/drier. 14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity..................................... ..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid 325 ml (11 fl oz) Item....................................................................................................................................................... ...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......- Fill Capacity................................................................................................................................. .............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) Refer to the Refrigerant Oil Adding / Procedures. See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1299 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity..................................... ..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid 325 ml (11 fl oz) Item....................................................................................................................................................... ...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......- Fill Capacity................................................................................................................................. .............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1300 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Adding Refrigerant Oil Adding NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTICE: During normal Air Conditioning (A/C) operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation. a If an excessive amount of refrigerant oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the total system refrigerant oil capacity must be Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1301 added. b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the refrigerant oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired. Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement - Non-Hybrid NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil. 1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations (clockwise) while collecting the PAG oil in a clean measuring cup. - Add the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery. Adding Refrigerant Oil After Electric A/C Compressor Replacement - Hybrid NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTE: Service electric A/C compressors are shipped with 60 ml (2 fl oz) of electric A/C compressor oil already installed. 1. Drain the oil from the old electric compressor into a clean measuring cup. - If the amount of oil drained is less than or equal to 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the amount of oil collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated. - If the amount of oil drained is greater than 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the difference between the amount collected and 60 ml (2 fl oz), plus the amount collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery, to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated. Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not add liquid based R-134a Leak Detection Dye to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric A/C compressor. Liquid based dyes are mixed with PAG oil, and will contaminate and damage the hybrid refrigerant system. Dye can only be added to hybrid vehicles by installing a new receiver/drier which includes a fluorescent dye "wafer" which will dissolve after approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. NOTE: The dye/lubricant injector is included as part of the 219-00069 R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set. NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct adapters to match the amount of refrigerant compressor oil to be injected. 3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1302 4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of new refrigerant compressor oil. 5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set. 6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1307 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1308 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1309 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1310 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1311 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1312 NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1313 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1318 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1319 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1320 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1321 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1322 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1323 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1328 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1329 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1330 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1331 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1332 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1333 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1340 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1341 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1344 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1345 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1346 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1351 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1352 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1353 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1354 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1355 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1358 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1359 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1360 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1361 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1362 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1363 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1364 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1365 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1366 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1367 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1368 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1369 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1370 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1371 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1372 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1373 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1374 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1375 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1376 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1377 Fuse Block: Connector Views Battery Junction Box (BJB) Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1378 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1379 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1380 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1381 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1382 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1383 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1384 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1385 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1391 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1393 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1394 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1395 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1398 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1399 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1400 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1401 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1402 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1403 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1404 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1406 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1409 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1410 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1411 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset > Page 1417 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Information And Message Center Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life. On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK ON [OFF]. For additional information on configurable items, refer to the Owner's Literature. The setup display modes are: - Reset to English (if set in another language) - System check - Oil life reset/oil life starting value - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off - Auto-unlock on/off - Language Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value The oil life is displayed in percentages and is preset to a maximum of 12,070 km (7,500 miles)/180 days (non-hybrid) or 12,070 km (7,500 miles) one year (hybrid). The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. Each 10% reduction lowers the oil life in both mileage and the days. For example, if the oil life start value is lowered to 50%, the maximum mileage is 6,035 km (3,750 miles)/90 days (non-hybrid) or 6,035 km (3,750 miles) 6 months (hybrid). The oil life remains at the selected setting (50% in this example) until the driver changes the oil life start value. When the oil life (not oil life start value) is reset back to 100% following an oil change, the oil life resets to 6,035 km (3,750 miles). For configuration of the oil life and oil life start value, refer to Message Center Configuration See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Service and Repair/Reset Procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1424 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXXs in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1434 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1435 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1441 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1442 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1447 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1448 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1449 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD) Removal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1450 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. 2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. 4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press. - Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. - Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1451 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tighten the wheel nuts in a star/cross pattern. Tighten to.................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................135 Nm (100 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. - Discard the wheel stud. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1461 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. - Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1462 against the washers. - Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub flange. 4. Remove the wheel nut and washers. 5. Install the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1467 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1489 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1490 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1491 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1492 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information. For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1493 couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1498 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1499 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1500 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine. 2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - Hybrid The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of charge stays greater than 35%. 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and monitor the traction battery state of charge PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic mode can be activated. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows: - Apply the parking brake. - Place the gear selector in the PARK position. - Verify the key is in the OFF position. - NOTE: Do not crank the engine. Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF. - Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10 seconds. - Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position and fully apply the accelerator pedal. - Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds. - Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. 6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set DTC P2535. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the throttle plate will fail to open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1506 Crank the engine as follows: - Depress and hold the brake pedal. - Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal. - Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position. - Release the accelerator pedal. - Release the brake pedal. 7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode. 9. Clear all DTCs. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1507 If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1508 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Cylinder Leakage Detection When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause. The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center (TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted. Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive. While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft sprocket bolts Tighten the bolt to......................................................................................... .................................................................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Camshaft: Procedures Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal clearance. Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions. - Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter. Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play. 2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. 4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play. - If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play. - If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head. Camshaft Surface Inspection Camshaft Surface Inspection 1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the contact area. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1517 Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions. Camshaft Lobe Lift Camshaft Lobe Lift NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift. - Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial Indicator Gauge reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift. Camshaft Runout Camshaft Runout Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1518 NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout. - Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial Indicator Gauge reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1519 Camshaft: Removal and Replacement Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts or crankshaft unless instructed to do so in this procedure. Rotating the camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause serious damage to the valves or pistons. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 4. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See: Adjustments. 5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to the engine. Turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation only. Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). - The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1520 6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed, rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts. 7. Remove the engine plug bolt. 8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during the camshaft removal and installation. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 9. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1521 10. Remove the lower timing hole plug from the engine front cover. 11. Remove the upper timing hole plug from the engine front cover. 12. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only. 13. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to collapse and create slack in the timing chain. Installing the M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will lock the tensioner arm in a retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust camshaft gear. Using a small pick tool, release the timing chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover timing hole. - Have an assistant rotate (using the flats of the camshaft) the exhaust camshaft clockwise to collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger. - Insert the M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner arm in the retracted position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1522 14. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust camshaft drive gear. 15. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 16. Remove the timing chain from the intake camshaft drive gear. 17. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1523 18. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the intake camshaft. Remove the intake camshaft from the engine. - Loosen the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts, in the sequence shown, one turn at a time until all tension is released from the camshaft bearing caps. - Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps. - Remove the intake camshaft. 19. Mark the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft for reference during installation. 20. Place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser and sprocket. Installation 1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the new parts. Position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the bolt. - Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft). 2. NOTICE: Install the intake camshaft with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and pistons. NOTE: Lubricate the intake camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the intake camshafts and bearing caps. Tighten the intake camshaft bearing caps in the sequence shown in 3 stages: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1524 - Stage 1: Tighten the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts until finger-tight. - Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in). 3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 4. Install the timing chain on the intake camshaft drive gear. 5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft. Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the exhaust camshaft. - Hand-tighten the bolt. 6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain. Remove the M6 x 30 mm bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the tensioner arm. 7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the exhaust camshaft drive gear bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1525 8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt. 10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 11. Install the upper timing hole plug in the engine front cover. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower timing hole plug. - Install the lower timing hole plug in the engine front cover. Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1526 13. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 14. Install the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 15. Install the VCT oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View Camshafts Camshafts Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1527 Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts unless instructed to in this procedure. Rotating the camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause serious damage to the valves and pistons. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the accessory drivebelt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 4. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 5. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See: Adjustments. 6. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to the engine. Turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation only. Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). - The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position. 7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1528 damage. NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed, rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts. 8. Remove the engine plug bolt. 9. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during the camshaft removal and installation. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 10. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. 11. Remove the lower front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1529 12. Remove the upper front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover. 13. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only. 14. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to collapse and create slack in the timing chain. Installing an M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will hold the tensioner arm in a retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust camshaft gear. Using a small pick tool, unlock the chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover timing hole. - Using the flats of the camshaft, have an assistant rotate the exhaust camshaft clockwise to collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger. - Insert an M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner arm in the retracted position. 15. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust camshaft drive gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1530 16. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 17. Remove the timing chain from the intake camshaft drive gear. 18. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference. 19. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the camshafts. NOTE: Mark the location and orientation of each camshaft bearing cap. Remove the camshafts from the engine. - Loosen the camshaft bearing cap bolts, in sequence, one turn at a time until all tension is released from the camshaft bearing caps. - Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps. - Remove the camshafts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1531 20. If removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket is necessary, mark the sprocket and camshaft for reference during installation. - If necessary, place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser and sprocket. Installation 1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the new parts. If necessary, position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise and install the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the bolt - Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft). 2. NOTICE: Install the camshafts with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and pistons. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the camshafts and bearing caps in their original location and orientation. Tighten the bearing caps in the sequence shown in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts one turn at a time, until finger-tight. - Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in). 3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1532 4. Install the timing chain on the intake camshaft drive gear. 5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft. Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the exhaust camshaft. - Hand-tighten the bolt. 6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain. Remove the M6 x 30 mm bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the tensioner arm. 7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts. - Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft). 8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1533 9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt. 10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 11. Install the upper front cover timing hole plug. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower front cover timing hole plug. - Install the plug and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 13. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 14. Install the accessory drivebelt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1534 15. Install the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 16. Install the VCT oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Procedures Valve Tappet Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection 1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Install new components as necessary. Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection 1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1539 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Removal and Replacement Valve Tappets Valve Tappets Removal and Installation NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts. 3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation. Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1544 Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1560 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1561 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1562 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1563 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information. For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1564 couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Balance Shaft Backlash 1. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at Top Dead Center (TDC). 2. Mark the balancer unit and shafts on the top for reference that the balancer unit is at TDC. 3. NOTE: Due to the precision interior construction of the balancer unit, it should not be disassembled. Remove the 4 bolts and the balancer unit. 4. Remove the adjustment shims from the seat faces of the balancer unit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1569 5. NOTICE: Visually inspect the balancer unit gear for damage and verify that the shaft turns smoothly. If there is any damage or malfunction, replace the balancer unit. Install the master adjustment shims (No. 50) on the seat faces of the balancer unit. 6. With the balancer unit shaft marks at the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the cylinder block to avoid interference between the crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear. 7. Install the balancer unit bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 8. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. - Rotate the crankshaft to confirm that there are no meshing problems between the balancer unit gear and the crankshaft gear. 9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1570 10. NOTE: Measure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment between measurements. NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a 5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not touching the balance shaft housing. NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown. Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash. - Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit. - Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. 11. NOTE: If maximum backlash exceeds 0.101 mm (0.003 in), install a new balancer unit. Using the backlash measurement, select the proper shims from the Adjustment Shim Selection Table. - Remove the balancer unit from the cylinder block. - Install the selected adjustment shims on the seat faces of the balancer unit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1571 12. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at TDC. 13. With the balancer unit shaft marks in the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the cylinder block to avoid interference between the crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear. 14. Install the balancer unit bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1572 15. NOTE: Remeasure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment between measurements. NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a 5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not touching the balance shaft housing. NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown. Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash. - Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit. - Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. - If the backlash exceeds the specified range of 0.005 to 0.101 mm (0.00019 to 0.0039 in), install a new balancer unit and repeat the procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect bearings for the following defects: 1. Cratering - fatigue failure 2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating 3. Imbedded dirty engine oil 4. Scratching - dirty engine oil 5. Base exposed - poor lubrication 6. Both edges worn - journal damaged 7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1579 a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals. Rod Bearing Cap Install the connecting caps and bolts. Tighten the bolts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to.................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......29 Nm (21 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten an additional............................................................................ .....................................................................................................90 degrees. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the crankshaft connecting rod journal diameters in 2 directions perpendicular to one another at each end of the connecting rod journal. The difference in the measurements from one end to the other is the taper. Verify measurement is within the wear limit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1582 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal clearance. 1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing. 2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface. 3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure. Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap. 4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1583 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bend Connecting Rod Bend NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod bend on a suitable alignment fixture. Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer. Verify the bend measurement is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1584 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Use a telescoping gauge to determine the ID of the connecting rod bushing, if equipped. 2. Measure the telescoping gauge with a micrometer. Verify the diameter is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1585 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the crankshaft connecting rod journal diameters in 2 directions perpendicular to one another at each end of the connecting rod journal. The difference in the measurements from one end to the other is the taper. Verify measurement is within the wear limit. Connecting Rod Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal clearance. 1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing. 2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface. 3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure. Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap. 4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance. Connecting Rod Bend Connecting Rod Bend Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1586 NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod bend on a suitable alignment fixture. Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer. Verify the bend measurement is within specification. Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Use a telescoping gauge to determine the ID of the connecting rod bushing, if equipped. 2. Measure the telescoping gauge with a micrometer. Verify the diameter is within specification. Connecting Rod Cleaning Connecting Rod Cleaning NOTICE: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage to connecting rods can occur. 1. NOTE: The connecting rod large end is a matched set. The connecting rod cap must be installed on the original connecting rod in the original position. Do not reverse the cap. Parts are not interchangeable. Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil passages. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1587 Connecting Rod Large End Bore Connecting Rod Large End Bore NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Tighten the bolts to specification, then measure the bore in 2 directions. The difference is the connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is within specification. Connecting Rod to Crankshaft Side Clearance Connecting Rod to Crankshaft Side Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the clearance between the connecting rod and the crankshaft. Verify the measurement is within specification. Connecting Rod Twist Connecting Rod Twist Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1588 NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod twist on a suitable alignment fixture. Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer. Verify the measurement is within specification. Connecting Rod-to-Piston Clearance Connecting Rod-to-Piston Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the clearance between the connecting rod and the piston. Verify the measurement is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1592 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1593 a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals. Main Bearing Cap Install and tighten the 10 main bearing beam bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to................................................................................................................... .......................................................................5 Nm (44 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten to.............................. ...........................................................................................................................................................2 5 Nm (18 lb-ft). Stage 3: Tighten an additional..................................................................................... ............................................................................................90 degrees. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1594 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1595 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect bearings for the following defects: 1. Cratering - fatigue failure 2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating 3. Imbedded dirty engine oil 4. Scratching - dirty engine oil 5. Base exposed - poor lubrication 6. Both edges worn - journal damaged 7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure each of the crankshaft main bearing journal diameters in at least 2 directions at each end of the main bearing journal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1600 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal clearance. 1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing. 2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface. 3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure. Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap. 4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1601 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft End Play Crankshaft End Play NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. 2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. 4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1602 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure each of the crankshaft main bearing journal diameters in at least 2 directions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Block Heater 2.5L 3.0L Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 2. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 3. Remove the block heater. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft) (2.5L). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1606 - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) (3.0L). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to...................................................... .................................................................................................................................100 Nm (74 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten an additional.............................................................................................................. ...................................................................90 degrees. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1610 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Removal NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur. NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 4. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to the engine. Turn the engine in the Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1611 normal direction of rotation only. Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). - The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position. 6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed, rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts. 7. Remove the engine plug bolt. 8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during the crankshaft pulley removal and installation. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 9. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during removal of the pulley bolt or damage to the engine can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool, and the bolt should be Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1612 removed using an air impact wrench (1/2-in drive minimum). NOTICE: The crankshaft sprocket diamond washer may come off with the crankshaft pulley. The diamond washer must be replaced. Remove and discard the diamond washer. If the diamond washer is not installed, engine damage may occur. Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in drive hand tool to hold the crankshaft pulley. Use an air impact wrench to remove the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. - Remove the crankshaft pulley. - Remove the diamond washer and discard. Installation 1. Install a new diamond washer. 2. NOTE: Do not install the crankshaft pulley bolt at this time. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing. Position the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft with the hole in the pulley at the 6 o'clock position. 3. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. 4. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during installation of the pulley bolt or damage to the engine can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and the bolt should be installed using hand tools only. NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt. Install a new crankshaft pulley bolt. Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in drive hand tool to hold the crankshaft pulley, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 100 Nm (74 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1613 - Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt. 6. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 7. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 8. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation. Turn the crankshaft clockwise one and three-fourths turns. 9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 10. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1614 11. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Using the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley. - If it is not possible to install the bolt, the engine valve timing must be corrected by repeating this procedure. 12. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate to check the position of the camshafts. - If it is not possible to install the Camshaft Alignment Plate, the engine valve timing must be corrected by repeating this procedure. 13. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate. 14. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt. 15. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1615 16. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 17. Install the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 18. Install the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 19. Install the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 20. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Piston: Procedures Piston Inspection Piston Inspection NOTICE: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or a wire brush to clean the pistons or damage can occur. 1. Clean and inspect the (1) ring lands, (2) skirts, (3) pin bosses and the (4) tops of the pistons. If wear marks, scores or glazing is found on the piston skirt, check for a bent or twisted connecting rod. 2. Use the Piston Ring Groove Scraper to clean the piston ring grooves. - Make sure the oil ring holes are clean. Piston Pin Bore Diameter Piston Pin Bore Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. NOTE: Piston and piston pins are a matched set and should not be interchanged. Measure the piston pin bore diameter in 2 directions on each side. Verify the diameter is within specification. Piston Diameter Piston Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1620 1. Measure the piston diameter 90 degrees from the piston pin and 42 mm (1.65 in) down from the top of the piston at the point indicated. Piston To Cylinder Bore Clearance Piston To Cylinder Bore Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder bore diameter to find the piston-to-cylinder bore clearance. Piston Selection Piston Selection NOTE: The cylinder bore must be within the specifications for taper and out-of-round before fitting a piston. 1. Select a piston size based on the cylinder bore. 2. NOTE: For precision fit, new pistons are divided into 3 categories within each size range based on their relative position within the range. A paint spot or specific size grade on a new piston indicates the position within the size range. Choose the piston with the correct paint color or specific size grade. Piston Ring End Gap Piston Ring End Gap NOTICE: Use care when fitting piston rings to avoid possible damage to the piston ring or the cylinder bore. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1621 NOTE: Piston rings should not be transferred from one piston to another. NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: The cylinder bore must be within specification for taper and out-of-round. 1. Use a piston without rings to push a piston ring in a cylinder to the bottom of ring travel. 2. Use the Feeler Gauge Set to measure the top piston ring end gap and the second piston ring end gap. Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Inspect the piston for ring land damage or accelerated wear. 2. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the piston ring-to-groove clearance. Piston Pin Diameter Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1622 Piston Pin Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the piston pin diameter in 2 directions at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1623 Piston: Overhaul Piston Disassembly 1. Remove the piston rings from the piston. - Discard the piston rings. 2. Remove the 2 piston pin retainers and the piston pin. 3. NOTE: If the piston and connecting rod are to be reinstalled, they must be assembled in the same orientation. Mark the piston orientation to the connecting rod for reassembly. Separate the piston from the connecting rod. 4. Clean and inspect the piston and connecting rod. For additional information, refer to Engine. Assembly 1. NOTE: The arrow on the top of the piston points towards the front of the engine. Align the piston-to-connecting rod orientation marks, and position the connecting rod in the piston. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1624 2. Lubricate the piston pin and pin bore with clean engine oil. 3. Install the piston pin in the piston and connecting rod assembly. 4. Install the piston pin retaining clips in the piston. 5. Lubricate the piston and the new piston rings with clean engine oil. 6. NOTE: The piston compression upper and lower ring should be installed with the paint mark on the outside diameter circumference of the ring to be positioned on the right side of the ring gap. The lower compression ring can also be installed with the undercut side downward. NOTE: The upper and lower compression ring gaps are not controlled for installation. Install the piston rings onto the piston as shown. 1. Piston pin 2. Upper oil control ring gap location 3. Lower oil control ring gap location 4. Center line of the piston pin bore and the expander gap Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Adjustments Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt. NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. 4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in). - exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in). The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: - intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in). - exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in). Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet thickness - nominal clearance. elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation location. 5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For additional information, refer to Valve Train Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1636 Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover Valve Cover (View 1 of 2) Valve Cover (2 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1640 Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the oil level indicator. 2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 3. Disconnect the crankcase vent hose. 4. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the radio capacitor electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector. 8. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the valve cover studs and position the harness aside. 9. Remove the 14 valve cover retainers, the valve cover and gasket. Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. 2. NOTE: The valve cover must be secured within 4 minutes of silicone gasket application. If the valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the locations shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1641 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the gasket. Install a new gasket, if necessary. Install the valve cover, gasket and retainers. - Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Position the wiring harness and attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover studs. 5. Connect the VCT solenoid electrical connector. 6. Connect the radio capacitor electrical connector. 7. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. 8. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 9. Connect the crankcase vent hose. 10. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 11. Install the oil level indicator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Inner Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if necessary. Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top, middle and bottom of the valve guide. 2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer. 3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements Valve Seat Inspection Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance. 1. Check the valve head and seat. - Check valve angles. - Check margin width. - Be sure margin width is within specification. 2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if abnormalities are found. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1649 Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Width Valve Seat Width NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification. - Measure the intake valve seat width. - Measure the exhaust valve seat width. - Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1650 Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Runout Valve Seat Runout NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Spring: Procedures Valve Spring Installed Length Valve Spring Installed Length NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Free Length Valve Spring Free Length NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the free length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Squareness Valve Spring Squareness 1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring. - Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square. Valve Spring Strength Valve Spring Strength Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1655 NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified valve spring length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1656 Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Springs Valve Springs Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1657 Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts. 3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. Remove the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed air from the cylinder until the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall into the cylinder. Connect the compressed air supply to cylinder No. 1. 6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side. Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring. - Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet, using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver. - Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring. Installation 1. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring. - Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer. - Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1658 2. Disconnect the compressed air supply. 3. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders. 4. Install the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 5. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them. 6. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter Valve Stem Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. 1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1663 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Inspect the following valve areas: 1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring. 2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores. 3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking. 4. The valve margin for wear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1664 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification. NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. 1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base. Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve guide. 2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and note the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Accessory Drive Belt Routing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Accessory Drive Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic transmissions. - WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: - if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. - the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak. - if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. - if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. - if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. - if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. - NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter > Page 1671 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation Accessory Drive Component Tests Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: - Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. - With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. - Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. - Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1674 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley. - Remove the accessory drive belt from the engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit. Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks, or some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for correct tension. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Mechanical Accessory Drive Component Tests Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under Accessory Drive See: Description and Operation in the Description and Operation. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: - Move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. - Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. - Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. 3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. See: Belt Tensioner - Dynamics 4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical > Page 1680 Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Dynamics Accessory Drive Component Tests Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1683 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley. 4. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit. Remove the 2 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Mount: Procedures Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing NOTE: Refer to the appropriate system and procedure for special instructions on loosening and tightening mount fasteners. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. NOTICE: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may occur. Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the same distance. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1688 Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement Engine Mount Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Install the Engine Support Bar. 3. Remove the engine mount bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Use the Engine Support Bar to raise the engine 25 mm (0.98 in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1689 5. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine mount bracket. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1694 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley Removal and Installation All idler pulleys 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley. Smooth idler pulley 4. Loosen the bolt and remove the smooth accessory drive belt idler pulley. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Grooved idler pulley 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the grooved accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ........................................................................................................... ..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1699 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the specification chart in the appropriate engine system. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: - Insufficient oil - Oil leakage - Worn or damaged oil pump - Oil pump screen cover and tube - Excessive main bearing clearance - Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance - Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar. Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1703 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1704 Oil Pump Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 5.0 Liters (5.3 Qt) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1709 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)* Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark *Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the spin-on oil filter. - To install, lubricate the spin-on oil filter gasket with clean engine oil and tighten the oil filter three-fourths turn after the oil filter gasket makes contact with the oil filter adapter. 5. NOTE: Discard the gasket. Remove the 4 bolts and the oil filter adapter. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar. Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1717 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1718 Oil Pump Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1719 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1720 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1721 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Oil Pan Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the transmission, do not loosen the transmission-to-engine bolts more than 5 mm (0.19 in). Loosen the 2 upper bellhousing-to-engine bolts 5 mm (0.19 in). All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 4. Working from the top of the vehicle, loosen the 2 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts 5 mm (0.19 in). 5. Working from under the vehicle, loosen the 2 RH engine bracket-to-Power Transfer Unit (PTU) bolts 5 mm (0.19 in). All vehicles 6. Remove the 7 retainers (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1722 7. Loosen the 2 LH bellhousing-to-engine bolts 5 mm (0.19 in). Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 8. Loosen the 1 (manual transaxle) or 2 (automatic transaxle) RH engine-to-bellhousing bolt 5 mm (0.19 in). All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts. 10. Remove the 2 bellhousing-to-oil pan bolts. 11. Slide the transaxle rearward 5 mm (0.19 in). 12. Drain the engine oil. - Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft). 13. Remove the 4 engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts. 14. Remove the 13 bolts and the oil pan. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces of sealant. Clean and inspect all mating surfaces. 2. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 10 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 10 minutes, whichever is longer. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan-to-engine block and to the oil pan-to-engine front cover mating surface. 3. Position the oil pan onto the engine and install the oil pan bolts finger-tight. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1723 4. NOTE: The engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts must be tightened first to align the front surface of the oil pan flush with the front surface of the engine block. Install the 4 engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). FWD vehicles 6. Alternate tightening the 1 LH bellhousing-to-engine and 1 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts to slide the transaxle and engine together. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Tighten the 1 remaining LH bellhousing-to-engine bolt. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. Tighten the 1 remaining RH engine-to-bellhousing bolt (automatic transaxle). - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). AWD vehicles 9. Alternate tightening the 1 RH engine-to-PTU bracket bolt and 1 LH bellhousing-to-engine bolt to slide transaxle and engine together. - Tighten the PTU bracket bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft). - Tighten the LH bellhousing bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 10. Tighten the remaining RH engine-to-PTU bracket bolt. - Tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft). 11. Tighten the 1 remaining LH lower bolt. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All vehicles 12. Install the 2 bellhousing-to-oil pan bolts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 13. Install the 2 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 14. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers (5 shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1724 AWD vehicles 15. Working from the top of vehicle, tighten the 2 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). All vehicles 16. Tighten the 2 upper bellhousing-to-engine bolts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 18. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1728 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1729 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1730 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1731 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar. Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1736 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1737 Oil Pump Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1738 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1739 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded View Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1740 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Oil Pan. 3. NOTE: Discard the gasket and clean and inspect the gasket mating surfaces. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ........................................................................................................... ..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1745 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the specification chart in the appropriate engine system. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: - Insufficient oil - Oil leakage - Worn or damaged oil pump - Oil pump screen cover and tube - Excessive main bearing clearance - Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance - Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Bolts Tighten to........................................................................................................... .........................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1752 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Intake Manifold (View 1 of 2) Intake Manifold (View 2 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1753 Removal and Installation 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the fuel rail. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the vacuum supply hose. - Depress the quick release locking ring. - Pull the vacuum hose out of the quick release fitting. 4. Disconnect the fuel vapor return hose from the intake manifold. 5. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. - Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer. 9. Detach the heater hose pin-type retainer. 10. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the intake manifold and position the wiring harness aside. 11. Loosen the clamp and disconnect Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe from the Throttle Body (TB). - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 12. Remove the intake manifold lower bolt. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 13. Remove the 6 bolts and position the intake manifold aside to access the crankcase vent oil separator tube and the EGR tube. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 14. Squeeze the 2 crankcase vent oil separator tube tabs and disconnect the tube from the intake manifold. 15. Remove the EGR tube. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1754 16. Remove the intake manifold and gaskets. 17. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to follow these instructions can result in engine damage. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Inspect and install new intake manifold gaskets if necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal Crankshaft Rear Seal Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the flexplate or flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flexplate or Flywheel See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flywheel. 3. Drain the engine oil. - Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft). 4. NOTICE: If the oil pan is not removed, damage to the rear oil seal retainer joint can occur. Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan. 5. Remove the 6 bolts and the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate. Installation 1. Using the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer, position the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate onto the crankshaft. 2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate and bolts. - To install, tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1760 3. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces of sealant. Clean and inspect all the oil pan and cylinder block mating surfaces. 4. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan. Install the oil pan. Install the 2 oil pan bolts finger-tight. 5. Install the 4 bolts. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. Install the remaining oil pan bolts and tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. Install the flexplate or flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flexplate or Flywheel See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flywheel. 8. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1761 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal Exploded View Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal Removal NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur. NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Diagrams and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair. 2. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the seal. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front oil seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Remove the through-bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer. NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil. Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front oil seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1765 2. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Diagrams and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1770 Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Seals Valve Seals Removal NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1771 2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts. 3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. Remove the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed air from the cylinder until the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall into the cylinder. Connect the compressed air supply to cylinder No. 1. 6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side. Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring. - Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet, using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver. - Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring. 7. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove and discard the valve seal. Installation 1. Install the valve stem seal installation sleeve. 2. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1772 3. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet. Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring. - Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer. - Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver. 4. Disconnect the compressed air supply. 5. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders. 6. Install the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 7. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them. 8. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1777 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1778 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1779 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1780 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Balance Shaft Backlash 1. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at Top Dead Center (TDC). 2. Mark the balancer unit and shafts on the top for reference that the balancer unit is at TDC. 3. NOTE: Due to the precision interior construction of the balancer unit, it should not be disassembled. Remove the 4 bolts and the balancer unit. 4. Remove the adjustment shims from the seat faces of the balancer unit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1788 5. NOTICE: Visually inspect the balancer unit gear for damage and verify that the shaft turns smoothly. If there is any damage or malfunction, replace the balancer unit. Install the master adjustment shims (No. 50) on the seat faces of the balancer unit. 6. With the balancer unit shaft marks at the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the cylinder block to avoid interference between the crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear. 7. Install the balancer unit bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 8. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. - Rotate the crankshaft to confirm that there are no meshing problems between the balancer unit gear and the crankshaft gear. 9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1789 10. NOTE: Measure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment between measurements. NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a 5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not touching the balance shaft housing. NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown. Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash. - Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit. - Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. 11. NOTE: If maximum backlash exceeds 0.101 mm (0.003 in), install a new balancer unit. Using the backlash measurement, select the proper shims from the Adjustment Shim Selection Table. - Remove the balancer unit from the cylinder block. - Install the selected adjustment shims on the seat faces of the balancer unit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1790 12. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at TDC. 13. With the balancer unit shaft marks in the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the cylinder block to avoid interference between the crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear. 14. Install the balancer unit bolts. - Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1791 15. NOTE: Remeasure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment between measurements. NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a 5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not touching the balance shaft housing. NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown. Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash. - Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit. - Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. - If the backlash exceeds the specified range of 0.005 to 0.101 mm (0.00019 to 0.0039 in), install a new balancer unit and repeat the procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft sprocket bolts Tighten the bolt to......................................................................................... .................................................................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Diagrams Timing Chain: Diagrams Timing Chain Alignment NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools as instructed in the procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur. NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. NOTE: Install a new crankshaft sprocket diamond washer on both sides of the crankshaft sprocket. Install the crankshaft sprocket, new crankshaft sprocket diamond washers, oil pump chain and oil pump sprocket. - The crankshaft sprocket flange must be facing away from the engine block. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time. Install the timing chain. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Install the timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston. Tighten to.............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1801 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Timing Drive Components Removal NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur. NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair. 3. Compress the timing chain tensioner in the following sequence. 1. Using a small pick, release and hold the ratchet mechanism. 2. While holding the ratchet mechanism in the released position, compress the tensioner by pushing the timing chain arm toward the tensioner. 3. Insert the paper clip into the hole to retain the tensioner. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and timing chain tensioner. 5. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm. 6. Remove the timing chain. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1802 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the timing chain guide. 8. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust camshaft sprocket. 9. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser and sprocket. Installation 1. Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 2. Install the timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1803 3. Install the timing chain. 4. Install the timing chain tensioner arm. NOTE: If the timing chain plunger and ratchet assembly are not pinned in the compressed position, follow the next 4 steps. 5. NOTICE: Do not compress the ratchet assembly. This will damage the ratchet assembly. Using the edge of a vise, compress the timing chain tensioner plunger. 6. Using a small pick, push back and hold the ratchet mechanism. 7. While holding the ratchet mechanism, push the ratchet arm back into the tensioner housing. 8. Install a paper clip into the hole in the tensioner housing to hold the ratchet assembly and the plunger in during installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1804 9. Install the timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 10. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent engine rotation can result in engine damage. Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts. - Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft). 11. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following specifications: Tighten the 8-mm bolts and stud bolt to........................................................................ ................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Tighten the 13-mm bolts to....... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1808 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1809 Removal NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur. NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt and the smooth idler pulley. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1810 4. Remove the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the seal. Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front oil seal. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley. 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket. 8. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 9. Remove and the 2 bolts and the CKP sensor. 10. Remove the bolts, stud bolt and the engine front cover. Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive disks or other abrasive means to clean sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. Clean and inspect the mounting surfaces of the engine and the front cover. 2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying the silicone gasket and sealant. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the cylinder head and oil pan joint areas. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1811 3. Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following specifications: - Tighten the 8-mm bolts and stud bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Tighten the 13-mm bolts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Install the coolant pump pulley and bolts. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Remove the through bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer. NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil. Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front oil seal. 7. Install the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1812 9. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. 10. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 11. Using the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner, adjust the CKP sensor. - Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 13. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt. 14. Install the accessory drive belt and smooth idler pulley. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 15. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1829 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1830 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1831 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1832 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information. For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1833 couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Filter: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 2. Remove the VCT system oil filter plug and the VCT system oil filter from the intake camshaft thrust cap. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1841 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1842 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1843 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine. 2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1848 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1849 All vehicles 7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP module fuse. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams Air Filter Element: Diagrams Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1854 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................1-3-4-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1863 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1868 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1869 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................AYSF-32-YPC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1870 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1871 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1874 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - Hybrid The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of charge stays greater than 35%. 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and monitor the traction battery state of charge PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic mode can be activated. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows: - Apply the parking brake. - Place the gear selector in the PARK position. - Verify the key is in the OFF position. - NOTE: Do not crank the engine. Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF. - Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10 seconds. - Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position and fully apply the accelerator pedal. - Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds. - Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. 6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set DTC P2535. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the throttle plate will fail to open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1880 Crank the engine as follows: - Depress and hold the brake pedal. - Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal. - Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position. - Release the accelerator pedal. - Release the brake pedal. 7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode. 9. Clear all DTCs. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1881 If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1882 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Cylinder Leakage Detection When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause. The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center (TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted. Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive. While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Adjustments Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt. NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. 4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in). - exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in). The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: - intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in). - exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in). Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet thickness - nominal clearance. elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation location. 5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For additional information, refer to Valve Train Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Install the coolant pump and bolts. Tighten to...................................................................................... ................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1889 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump - 2.5L Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 2. Loosen the 3 coolant pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley. 5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing and tightening the fasteners, or damage to the coolant pump may occur. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump. - Remove and discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1894 - Fill the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair Bypass Tube - 2.5L Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Disconnect and remove the coolant bypass tube. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................. 7.4 Quarts ( 7.0 Liters ) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1902 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored) Ford Part Number - VC-7-B Ford Specification - WSS-M97B51-A1 Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one-half turn counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap. 2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. 3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle. 5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. - Remove the degas bottle. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair for the recommended coolant mixture and fill level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 1911 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Engine Cooling Fan Motor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1921 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1922 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1923 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1924 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1933 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934 Engine Cooling Fan Motor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1937 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fan Control The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs. For variable speed electric fan(s): The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power applied to the fan motor). EDGE/MKX, FLEX, MKS, MKT, TAURUS, FUSION/MILAN/MKZ, CROWN VICTORIA/GRAND MARQUIS, TOWN CAR: FCV DUTY CYCLE OUTPUT FROM PCM (negative duty cycle) For relay controlled fans: The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC), (single speed fan applications), low fan control (LFC) and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some applications have the xFC circuit wired to 2 separate relays. For 2-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low and high fan control, cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the following tables. 2.0L Focus And Transit Connect (With A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds 2.5L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1938 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2.5L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1939 All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support. 9. Remove the center support bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.5L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. All vehicles 12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers. 13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.5L vehicles only 15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1944 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1945 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1948 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1949 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1950 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1951 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1952 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1956 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation Fan Clutch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cooling Fan Clutch The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of 3 main elements: a working chamber - a reservoir chamber - a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation. The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation. The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase. Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1963 Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 1969 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1973 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1974 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1975 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1976 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 1979 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1980 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2.5L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1984 All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support. 9. Remove the center support bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.5L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. All vehicles 12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers. 13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.5L vehicles only 15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1989 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1990 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1991 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1992 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Radiator: Testing and Inspection Engine Cooling Component Tests Radiator Leak Test, Removed From Vehicle NOTICE: Never leak test an aluminum radiator in the same water that copper/brass radiators are tested in. Flux and caustic cleaners may be present in the cleaning tank and they will damage aluminum radiators. NOTE: Clean the radiator before leak testing to avoid contamination of tank. 1. Leak test the radiator in clean water with pressurized air to the maximum pressure listed in Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1996 Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator - 2.5L Radiator Hoses Radiator Removal and Installation 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud See: Radiator Cooling Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1997 Fan/Radiator Cooling Fan Motor/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator. 4. Disconnect the lower degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator. 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 6. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position aside the A/C condenser. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 7. Remove the radiator. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2003 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2004 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2007 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2008 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2010 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2011 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch. Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2021 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2025 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2026 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2027 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2028 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2031 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2032 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2036 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Engine Cooling Component Tests Thermostat A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried out: - Pinpoint Test A, B or C - Thermostat Visual Inspection Thermostat Visual Inspection 1. Remove the thermostat. 2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including: - Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve) - Foreign material lodged in the main valve - Bent or broken frame or flange - Bent or broken spring - Bent or broken valve or valve stem - Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir - Any other damage or distortion 3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using hot water or other heat sources. This method is not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat. If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install a new thermostat. 4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to the Symptom Chart for further instructions. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing - 2.5L NOTE: The thermostat and thermostat housing are serviced as an assembly. Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the heater hose from the thermostat housing. 3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 4. NOTE: The view of the thermostat housing bolts is obstructed by A/C and other engine components. However, the bolts can be removed by using 1/4-in drive hand tools. Remove the 3 bolts and thermostat housing. - Remove and discard the gasket. - To install, tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Install the coolant pump and bolts. Tighten to...................................................................................... ................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2043 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump - 2.5L Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. 2. Loosen the 3 coolant pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley. 5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing and tightening the fasteners, or damage to the coolant pump may occur. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump. - Remove and discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor Only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the sensors after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. Typical V-Engine Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2048 Typical In-Line Engine Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency A TWC requires a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of gasoline (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. For vehicles using E85 the required air/fuel ratio is 9.8:1. Other gasoline/ethanol mixtures require a variable air/fuel ratio between 14.7:1 to 9.8:1 dependent on the percentage of ethanol content. TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart Exhaust System The exhaust system conveys engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2049 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view. Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold Catalytic Converter - 2.5L Manifold, Hybrid Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe. 3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts. 4. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connectors. 5. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold nuts. 6. Remove the catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle. - Discard the catalytic converter manifold gasket. 7. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold studs. 8. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. Installation 1. Install the 7 new catalytic converter manifold studs. - Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Using a new gasket, install the catalytic converter and the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence shown. - Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Connect the HO2S and the CMS electrical connectors. 4. Install the 2 exhaust bracket bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Install the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2052 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2053 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2054 3.0L (View 2 of 2) 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2055 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2056 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody Catalytic Converter - Underbody Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2.5L vehicles 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. All vehicles 3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts. 4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts. 5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly. - Remove and discard the gaskets. 2.5L vehicles 6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2057 3.0L vehicles 7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. 2.5L hybrid vehicles 8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Installation NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur. NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger insulators as required. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. 1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section. 2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2058 3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 4 and 5. 4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange. 5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7. 6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange. 7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2059 8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers. 9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand. 10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand. 12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Install 7 new exhaust manifold studs in the cylinder head. Tighten to.................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................17 Nm (150 lb-in). NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Position the exhaust manifold and tighten the 7 new exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to............................................................................................................ .............................................................................48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 4 bolts. Tighten to..................................................... .................................................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Manifold: Procedures Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing surfaces. 2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an exhaust manifold is serviced. NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On(R) GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end to end. Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2065 Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement Exhaust Manifold Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust downpipe and exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter. 3. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 exhaust manifold heat shield bolts and the heat shield. 5. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. 6. Remove the exhaust manifold and discard the exhaust manifold gasket. 7. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold studs. 8. Clean and inspect the exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. Installation 1. Install the 7 new exhaust manifold studs. - Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Install a new exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and 7 new nuts in the sequence shown in 2 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2066 - Stage 2: Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 4 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 5. Install the exhaust downpipe and exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Downpipe Exhaust Downpipe - 2.5L Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Intermediate Pipe. 3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 2 exhaust downpipe-to-exhaust manifold nuts and the exhaust downpipe. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2071 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2072 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2073 3.0L (View 2 of 2) 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2074 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2075 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Intermediate Pipe Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2.5L 2. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts. 2.5L hybrid 3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts. All vehicles 4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust intermediate pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts and remove the intermediate pipe. Installation All vehicles 1. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). 2. If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange. 3. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate flange. If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2076 4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe gasket by hand. 5. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2.5L hybrid 6. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2.5L 7. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2085 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2091 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2096 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2097 3.0L (View 2 of 2) 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2098 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2099 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Muffler Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The production 2.5L catalytic converter, resonator and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and resonator/muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: The production 3.0L and 2.5L hybrid catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. The muffler and catalytic converter are serviced together. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter - Underbody See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Underbody. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator spring nuts. 3. NOTICE: Remove the resonator-to-muffler gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers and remove the resonator. - Discard the gasket. Installation 1. Inspect the resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). 2. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud(s) out of the flange. 3. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2103 4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket. 5. Install the resonator and attach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers. 6. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Control Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2110 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming instructions, if necessary. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step clears DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This makes sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body (ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster (IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2114 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1) ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2115 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2116 APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2138 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2142 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2144 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2145 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2146 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2147 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2148 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2149 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2152 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2153 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2157 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2158 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2163 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2165 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2169 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2170 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2176 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2177 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2181 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2182 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2183 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2184 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2185 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure. Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2193 Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2198 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2199 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2202 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2203 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2204 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2205 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2213 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2217 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2218 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2219 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2220 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2221 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2222 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2223 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2224 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2225 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2229 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2230 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2231 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2232 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2235 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2236 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2241 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2242 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2243 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2244 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2248 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2249 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Typical In-tank FTP Sensor Typical In-line FTP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2253 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2254 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2255 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2256 Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2261 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2262 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2265 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2266 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2267 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2268 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2269 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2270 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2274 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2275 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2276 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor. Typical MAP Sensor Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2277 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2285 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2286 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2287 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2288 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2289 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2292 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2293 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2294 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical HO2S Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2297 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2300 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2301 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2306 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2310 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 2315 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2319 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2320 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2321 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2322 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2323 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2324 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2325 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2330 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling. Typical VSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2335 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2340 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2341 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2345 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2346 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2347 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2348 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2349 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome light does not affect the FP module control. The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump. Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi) lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379 kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 2354 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2361 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2362 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2363 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Typical IFS Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2364 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 2369 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2375 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2376 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2379 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2380 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2381 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2382 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2386 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2387 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2388 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2389 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2390 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2391 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2392 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2393 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2394 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2404 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2410 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2411 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2416 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2417 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2420 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2421 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2422 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2423 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2424 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2425 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2430 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2431 All vehicles 7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP module fuse. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams Air Filter Element: Diagrams Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2436 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................1-3-4-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2445 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2450 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2451 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................AYSF-32-YPC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2452 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2453 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2456 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Compression Test - Hybrid The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of charge stays greater than 35%. 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and monitor the traction battery state of charge PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic mode can be activated. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows: - Apply the parking brake. - Place the gear selector in the PARK position. - Verify the key is in the OFF position. - NOTE: Do not crank the engine. Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF. - Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10 seconds. - Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position and fully apply the accelerator pedal. - Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds. - Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. 6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set DTC P2535. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the throttle plate will fail to open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2462 Crank the engine as follows: - Depress and hold the brake pedal. - Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal. - Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position. - Release the accelerator pedal. - Release the brake pedal. 7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode. 9. Clear all DTCs. Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2463 If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2464 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection Engine Component Tests The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns. Cylinder Leakage Detection When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause. The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center (TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted. Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive. While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Adjustments Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt. NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. 4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm. NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in). - exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in). The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are: - intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in). - exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in). Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet thickness - nominal clearance. elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation location. 5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For additional information, refer to Valve Train Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2472 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2473 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2477 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2478 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2479 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2480 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2481 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2485 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2486 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2487 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2488 Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure. Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Control Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2495 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming instructions, if necessary. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step clears DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This makes sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2501 Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2506 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2507 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2510 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2511 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2512 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2513 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2521 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2525 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2526 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2527 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2528 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2529 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2530 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2531 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2532 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2533 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2537 Data Link Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2541 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2542 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM. There are 2 designs for the TAC, parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical In-Line TAC Design Typical Parallel TAC Design Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body (ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster (IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2546 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1) ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2547 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2548 APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2570 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2571 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2572 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2573 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2574 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2575 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2576 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2577 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2578 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2579 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2580 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2581 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2584 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2585 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2592 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2595 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2596 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2601 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2602 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2603 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2604 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2608 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2609 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Typical In-tank FTP Sensor Typical In-line FTP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2617 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2618 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2619 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2620 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2621 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2622 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2623 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2624 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2625 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2626 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2627 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2628 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2629 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2630 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2631 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2632 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2633 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2634 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2635 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2636 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2637 14-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2638 14-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2639 Information Bus: Description and Operation Communications Network Multiplexing is a method of sending 2 or more signals simultaneously over a single circuit. Multiplexing is used to allow 2 or more electronic modules (nodes) to communicate simultaneously over a twisted-wire pair [data (+) and data (-)] network. The information or messages that can be communicated on these wires consists of commands, status or data. The advantage of using multiplexing is to reduce the weight of the vehicle by reducing the number of redundant components and electrical wiring. The vehicle has 2 module communication networks which are connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC), located under the instrument panel: - High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) - Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Network Topology Network Termination The Controller Area Network (CAN) uses network termination to improve communication reliability. Termination modules are located at both ends of the network. As network messages are broadcast in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination resistors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2640 Each termination module has an internal 120 ohm resistor that bridges across the positive and negative bus connection. With two 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms. Network termination improves bus message reliability by: - stabilizing bus voltage. - eliminating electrical interference. Gateway Module The Instrument Cluster (IC) is the gateway module, translating messages on the HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The IC is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Communications Network Principles of Operation Communications Network Principles of Operation Both the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) and the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) use an unshielded twisted-pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The HS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for applications in which modules must respond as rapidly as required by the driver or needed by the process being controlled. The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for general information transfer. High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Modules The following modules are on the HS-CAN: - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - ABS module - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid only) - Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid only) - Instrument Cluster (IC) (gateway module) - Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped) - PCM - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) - Restraints Control Module (RCM) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid only) Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Modules The following modules are on the MS-CAN: - APIM (if equipped) - Audio Control Module (ACM) - Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2643 - Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) - Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped) - HVAC module (if equipped) - IC (gateway module) - Smart Junction Box (SJB) Controller Area Network (CAN) Fault Tolerance NOTE: The oscilloscope traces below are from the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) oscilloscope taken using the IDS pre-configured Controller Area Network (CAN) settings. The traces are for both data (+) and data (-) taken simultaneously (2-channel) at a sample rate of 1 mega-sample per second (1MS/s) or greater. Traces below are viewed at 500mV per division (vertical axis) and 20 microseconds (20A■µs) per division (horizontal axis). Readings taken with a different oscilloscope vary from those shown. Compare any suspect readings to a known good vehicle. Normal CAN Operation The data (+) and data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a message is sent. Successful communication of a message can usually be identified by the slight spike at the end of a message transmission. Any signals that are significantly different than the normal CAN waveform may cause network DTCs (U-codes) to set or may cause a complete network outage. CAN Circuits Shorted Together Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2644 In the event that the data (+) and data (-) circuits become shorted together, the signal stays at base voltage (2.5V) continuously and all communication capabilities are lost. CAN (+) Circuit Shorted To Ground In the event that the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to ground, both the data (+) and data (-) circuits are pulled low (0V) and all communication capabilities are lost. CAN (-) Circuit Shorted To Ground Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2645 In the event that the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to ground, the data (-) circuit is pulled low (0V) and the data (+) circuit reaches near-normal peak voltage (3.0V) during communication but falls to 0V instead of normal base voltage (2.5V). Communication may continue but at a degraded level. CAN (+) Circuit Shorted To Battery Voltage In the event that the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, the data (+) circuit is pulled high (12V) and the data (-) circuit falls to abnormally high voltage (above 5V) during communication and reaches battery voltage (12V) for peak voltage. Communication may continue but at a degraded level. CAN (-) Circuit Shorted To Battery Voltage Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2646 In the event that the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, both the data (+) and data (-) circuits are pulled high (12V) and all communication capabilities are lost. CAN Circuit Signal Corruption Rhythmic oscillations, inductive spikes or random interference can disrupt the network communications. The corruption signal source may be outside electrical interference such as motors or solenoids or internal interference generated from a module on the network. In some cases, an open in either the data (+) or data (-) circuit to a network module may cause the module to emit interference on the one circuit which is still connected. The trace shown is an example of a "sawtooth" pattern transmitted from a module with one open network circuit. Other corruptions may be present when a module is intermittently powered up and down. The module on power up may initiate communication out of sync with other modules on the network causing momentary communication outages. Controller Area Network (CAN) Multiplex Messages Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2647 Modules on the CAN utilize simultaneous communication of 2 or more messages on the same network circuits. The following chart summarizes the messages sent and received on the network. CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Non-Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2648 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2649 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2650 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2651 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2652 CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2653 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2654 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2655 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2656 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2657 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2658 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2659 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2660 Inspection and Verification Communications Network Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. - If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. Visual Inspection Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2661 3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - GO to Pinpoint Test W, to diagnose No Power To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool 4. Establish a scan tool session. NOTE: The scan tool first attempts to communicate with the PCM, after establishing communication with the PCM, the scan tool then attempts to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle. If an IDS session cannot be established with the vehicle, (IDS may state "No communication can be established with the PCM"): - Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts whether or not to retry communication. - Enter either a PCM part number, tear tag or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a session (the PCM part number and 4-character tear tag are printed on the PCM label). - GO to Pinpoint Test A to diagnose the PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool 5. Carry out the network test. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step 6. - If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to diagnose the failed communication network. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2662 - If a module fails to communication during the network test, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 6. Retrieve and review the DTCs. - If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart - If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Module Configuration Inspection and Verification Module Configuration Inspection and Verification This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedures when another diagnostic/repair information directs to carry out configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present: See: Programming and Relearning Principles of Operation Module Configuration Principles of Operation Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in incorrect operation and/or DTCs setting. The following are the 3 different methods of configuration: - Programmable Module Installation (PMI) - Module reprogramming ("flashing") - Programmable parameters Some modules do not support all 3 methods. Definition of Terms The following are definitions of configuration terms: Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is available. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) See: Service and Repair. NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning Module Reprogramming Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2663 Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the strategy/calibration in a module. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. Module reprogramming is automatically carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available. NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published TSB procedure recommends doing so. NOTE: A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other modules during the reprogramming process. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) programming is a process that updates the APIM Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) and Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) software. The VIP programming updates the calibration files in the portion of the APIM which interfaces with the Controller Area Network (CAN). The CIP programming updates calibration files in the portion of the APIM that interfaces with mobile phones and other customer devices. APIM programming uses the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) to read and program the VIP software through the Data Link Connector (DLC). A web-based On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) application is used to read and program the CIP software via a Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable between the scan tool and vehicle USB port. Both the VCM and OASIS application must be running on the scan tool during APIM programming. To carry out APIM programming, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming See: Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS). Programmable Parameters Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these options are programmable parameters. Adaptive Learning and Calibration Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), tire size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with cruise control. Transmission Identification Block Some PCMs also contain a memory area called a transmission identification block. The PCM transmission identification block stores solenoid body flow data. If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. Module Address A unique module address is assigned to each module on the network for identification. As-Built Data As-Built data is a VIN-specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured. NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This data may be accessed from the technician service publication website. The following chart lists As-Built data addresses and describes specific module configuration information: Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2664 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2665 Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2666 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2667 Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Communications Network Communications Network DTC Charts NOTE: Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair procedures such as module reprogramming often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network wiring, especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery, refer to Battery. NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix to assist in determining DTC history. Communication Network DTC Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2668 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2669 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2670 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2671 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2672 Module Configuration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2673 Module Configuration DTC Chart NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix to assist in determining DTC history. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2674 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2675 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Communications Network Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2676 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2677 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2678 Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 24 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - PCM PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- A1 VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN MODULES PASS THE NETWORK TEST - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - In the LH pane of the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) network test display screen, verify whether any HS-CAN modules passed the network test. - Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): 4x4 control module, ABS module, Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), Battery Control Module (BCM), Instrument Cluster (IC), Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Parking Aid Module (PAM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) or PCM? Yes If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present. GO to Pinpoint Test R to diagnose an intermittent HS-CAN fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2. No No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN. GO to Pinpoint Test T to diagnose no HS-CAN communication. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- A2 VERIFY COMPUTERS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS INFORMATION PINPOINT TEST QA HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT - Verify that pinpoint test QA has been carried out. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2679 - Has pinpoint test QA been carried out? Yes GO to A3. No REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information, Pinpoint Tests, pinpoint test QA to diagnose no communication with the PCM. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6. No For non-hybrid, GO to A4. For hybrid, GO to A5. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - NON-HYBRID - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2680 CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - HYBRID - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-43, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2681 Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 42 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Vehicle Dynamic Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: The following test steps use the engine cooling fan to simulate normal circuit loads. It is necessary to create 2 4-foot jumper wires to carry out the voltage drop testing on both the voltage input and the ground side. Use only 10 gauge wire and terminals that are capable of carrying 40 amps to make the jumper wires. In addition, the jumper wires must be fused using a 40A fuse to protect the components. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE ABS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: ABS Module C155 . - Ignition ON. - For non-hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows: Non-Hybrid - For hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows: Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2682 - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to B2. No For non-hybrid, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 9 (50A), 18 (20A) or 25 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number For hybrid, VERIFY the BJB fuse 9 (50A), 18 (50A) or 27 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - For non-hybrid, measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and ground. - For hybrid, measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness side and ground; and between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-12, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-13, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2683 harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to B4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Engine Cooling Fan C1074. - Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-1, circuit SBB09 (RD), harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side. - Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side and the battery negative post. NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being incorrectly carried out. - Measure the voltage between the BJB fuse 9 (50A) and the ABS module C155-1, circuit SBB09 (RD), harness side. - Is the voltage less than 0.4 volt? Yes For Escape and Mariner, GO to B6. For Hybrid, GO to B5. No REPAIR circuit SBP09 (RD) for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B5 TEST THE HOT AT ALL TIMES B+ VOLTAGE INPUT CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE - Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-32, circuit SBB18 (YE/RD), harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side. - Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side and the battery negative post. - NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being incorrectly carried out. - Measure the voltage between the BJB fuse 18 (50A) and the ABS module C155-32, circuit SBB18 (YE/RD), harness side. - Is the voltage less than 0.4 volt? Yes GO to B6. No REPAIR circuit SBP18 (YE/RD) for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2684 ------------------------------------------------- B6 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE GROUND CIRCUIT NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being incorrectly carried out. - Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side. - Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side and the battery positive post. - On Escape and Mariner, measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and the battery negative post. - On Hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), harness side and the battery negative post. - Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt? Yes For the Escape and Mariner, VERIFY ground G105 is securely tightened. GO to B8. For Hybrid, VERIFY ground G110 is securely tightened. GO to B7. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) (Escape and Mariner) or GD179 BK/VT) (Hybrid) or the battery negative cable to body ground for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B7 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT (HYBRID) - Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side. - Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side and the battery positive post. - NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being incorrectly carried out. - Measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness side and the battery negative post. - Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt? Yes VERIFY ground G112 is securely tightened. GO to B8. No REPAIR circuit GD179 (BK/VT) or the battery negative cable to body ground for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B8 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect the ABS module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2685 ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 60 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Instrument Cluster for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Instrument Cluster (IC) communicates with the scan tool and with other modules through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). The IC does not communicate with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse(s) - Wiring, terminals or connectors - IC PINPOINT TEST C: THE IC DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC). - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit 1828 (PK/LG), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to C3. No GO to C2. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2686 - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C7. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to C5. No GO to C4. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2687 - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C7. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE IC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-9, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C6. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE IC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the IC C220-19, circuit SBP26 (YE/RD), harness side and ground; and between the IC C220-20, circuit CBP29 (WH/VT), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2688 - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to C7. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 26 (10A) or 29 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the short circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Restraints Control Module (RCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2689 - Wiring, terminals or connectors - RCM PINPOINT TEST E: THE RCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification ------------------------------------------------- E1 CHECK THE RCM CONNECTION - Ignition OFF. - Depower the SRS. Refer to Restraint Systems. - Disconnect: RCM C2041a . - Disconnect: RCM C2041b . Are RCM C2041a and C2041b pins OK? Yes GO to E2. No REPAIR the RCM connector pins as necessary. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E2 CHECK THE RCM CASE GROUND FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the metal RCM case and a good chassis ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to E3. No REPAIR the case ground connection. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. Repeat the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E3 CHECK THE RCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Repower the SRS. Refer to Restraint Systems. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the RCM C2041a-13, circuit CBP31 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2690 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to E4. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint Systems. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- E4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-10, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to E5. No REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the RCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2691 - Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 34 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Four Wheel Drive Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The 4X4 control module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - 4X4 control module PINPOINT TEST D: THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- D1 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the 4X4 control module C3184-4, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground; and between the 4X4 control module C3184-5, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness side and ground. - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2692 GO to D2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 11 (10A) and 35 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-15, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D4. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2693 No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to Transfer Case. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - OCSM PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- F1 CHECK THE OCSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: OCSM C3285 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the OCSM C3285-1, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2694 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to F2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- F2 CHECK THE OCSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-14, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to F3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- F3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCSM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-18, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2695 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to F4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- F4 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION - Disconnect the OCSM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 43 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Steering Controls for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - PSCM PINPOINT TEST G: THE PSCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2696 NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- G1 CHECK THE PSCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: PSCM C2231a . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the PSCM C2231a-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to G2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- G2 CHECK THE PSCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: PSCM C2231b . - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231b-2, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to G3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- G3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PSCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231a-2, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2697 - Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231a-3, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to G4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- G4 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PSCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new steering column. REFER to Steering Column. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 29 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Transmission Controls for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2698 Normal Operation The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only. The TCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - TCM PINPOINT TEST H: THE TCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- H1 CHECK THE TCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: TCM C1458a . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the TCM, harness side and ground as follows: - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to H2. No VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 5 (10A) or fuse 24 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- H2 CHECK THE TCM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-2, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side and ground; and between the TCM C1458a-8, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2699 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to H3. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- H3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE TCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-1, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-7, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to H4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- H4 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the TCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the TCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2700 Yes INSTALL a new TCM. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Battery Control Module (BCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only. The BCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - BCM PINPOINT TEST I: THE BCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE BCM WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: BCM C4227a . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2701 - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to I2. No VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 8 (5A), 25 (5A), 26 (20A) and 15 (50A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE BCM GROUNDS - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows: - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2702 GO to I3. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE BCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-29, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-28, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to I4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step. - Disconnect all the BCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the BCM connectors and make they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2703 Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 131 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking Aid for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Parking Aid Module (PAM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - PAM PINPOINT TEST J: THE PAM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- J1 CHECK THE PAM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: PAM C4014 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the PAM C4014-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the short circuit. TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK THE PAM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-4, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2704 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to J3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PAM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to J4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION - Disconnect the PAM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2705 Yes INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 55 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Automatic Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number NOTE: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only. Normal Operation The ACCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ACCM PINPOINT TEST K: THE ACCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- K1 CHECK THE ACCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: ACCM C1469a . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the ACCM C1469a-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2706 GO to K2. No VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 27 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE ACCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-4, circuit GD123 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to K3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-2, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-3, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2707 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to K4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACCM OPERATION - Disconnect the ACCM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the ACCM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new ACCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 54 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Manual Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 55 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Automatic Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The HVAC module communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). NOTE: The Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) HVAC module does not communicate with the scan tool. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - HVAC module PINPOINT TEST L: THE HVAC MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2708 NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- L1 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) . - Ignition ON. - For gasoline engines (without hybrid), measure the voltage between the HVAC module C2356a-12 or C2357a-12, circuit CBP37 (WH), harness side and ground; and between the HVAC module C2356a-13 or C2357a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and ground. - For hybrid, measure the voltage between the HVAC module C2356a-12 circuit CH122 (WH/OG), harness side and ground; and between the HVAC module C2356a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and ground. - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to L2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 15 (10A) or fuse 37 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- L2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-23 or C2357a-23, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to L3. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2709 No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- L3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HVAC MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-25 or C2357a-25, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-26 or C2357a-26, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to L4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- L4 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new HVAC module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2710 Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - GPSM PINPOINT TEST M: THE GPSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- M1 CHECK THE GPSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: GPSM C2300 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the GPSM C2300-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2711 Yes GO to M2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- M2 CHECK THE GPSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-6, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to M3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- M3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE GPSM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2712 - Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-3, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to M4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2713 ------------------------------------------------- M4 CHECK FOR CORRECT GPSM OPERATION - Disconnect the GPSM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the GPSM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new GPSM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - FDIM PINPOINT TEST N: THE FDIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- N1 CHECK THE FDIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: FDIM C2123 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the FDIM C2123-12, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2714 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to N2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- N2 CHECK THE FDIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-8, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to N3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- N3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FDIM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-4, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-5, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2715 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to N4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- N4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION - Disconnect the FDIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new FDIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - FCIM PINPOINT TEST O: THE FCIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2716 NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- O1 CHECK THE FCIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: FCIM C2402 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the FCIM C2402-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to O2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- O2 CHECK THE FCIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-2, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to O3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- O3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FCIM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2717 - Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-4, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to O4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- O4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION - Disconnect the FCIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new FCIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2718 Normal Operation The Audio Control Module (ACM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ACM PINPOINT TEST P: THE ACM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- P1 CHECK THE ACM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: ACM C240a . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the ACM C240a-1, circuit SBP39 (WH/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to P2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 39 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- P2 CHECK THE ACM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the ACM C240a-13, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to P3. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2719 No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- P3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: ACM C240b . - Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-15, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-16, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to P4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- P4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION - Disconnect all the ACM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2720 Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 10 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Grounds for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Smart Junction Box (SJB) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB PINPOINT TEST Q: THE SJB DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Q1 CHECK THE SJB FUSE FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Measure the voltage between the back of the SJB fuse 5 (10A) terminals (both sides) and ground. - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Q2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 5 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- Q2 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Disconnect: SJB C2280d . - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-8, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground; and between the SJB C2280d-12, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2721 - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to Q3. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- Q3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: SJB C2280b . - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to Q4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- Q4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2722 No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - APIM PINPOINT TEST R: THE APIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- R1 CHECK THE APIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: APIM C3338 . - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the APIM C3338-1, circuit SBP03 (BU/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to R2. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 3 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- R2 CHECK THE APIM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2723 - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-37, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground; and between the APIM C3338-38, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to R3. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- R3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-53, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-54, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to R4. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- R4 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-16, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2724 - Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-17, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to R5. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- R5 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION - Disconnect the APIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently Established Normal Operation The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. In the event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (HS-CAN + or Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2725 HS-CAN -) becomes open to a module on the network, unreliable network communication to all modules on the network may result. - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - ABS module - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid) - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - PCM - Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped) - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) - Restraints Control Module (RCM) - Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid) This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors PINPOINT TEST S: INTERMITTENT NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED NOTE: Various modules set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear the DTCs from all modules after the diagnostic procedure is complete. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- S1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC). - Inspect DLC pins 6 and 14 for damage. - Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK? Yes GO to S2. No REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- S2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2726 GO to S3. No GO to Pinpoint Test T. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- S3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the battery negative cable. GO to S4. No GO to Pinpoint Test T. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- S4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 6 volts? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No GO to S5. ------------------------------------------------- S5 CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED NOTE: An Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) session must be established prior to disabling the PCM in this test step. If the PCM has failed communication during multiple attempts to identify the vehicle, first identify the vehicle manually by entering a PCM part number, calibration number or tear tag when prompted by IDS. NOTE: When a vehicle is manually identified by a PCM part number, calibration number or tear tag, the IDS does not automatically run a network test. The network test must be manually selected and run. NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: PCM C175b . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2727 - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the PCM. GO to Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the PCM. For hybrid, GO to S6. For non-hybrid, GO to S7. ------------------------------------------------- S6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE BCM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: BJB Fuses 26 (20A) and 8 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test I. See: Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to S7. ------------------------------------------------- S7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE PSCM, THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE (IF EQUIPPED) AND THE PAM (IF EQUIPPED) DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 35 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. For vehicles equipped with an PSCM only, GO to Pinpoint Test G. See: Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool For vehicles also equipped with a 4X4 control module and/or a PAM, GO to S8. No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S11. ------------------------------------------------- S8 VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 4X4 CONTROL MODULE - Inspect the vehicle for a 4X4 control module. - Is the vehicle equipped with a 4X4 control module? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2728 GO to S9. No GO to S10. ------------------------------------------------- S9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the 4X4 control module. GO to Pinpoint Test D. See: Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the 4X4 control module. GO to S10. ------------------------------------------------- S10 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: PAM C4014 . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the PAM. GO to Pinpoint Test J. See: Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the PAM. GO to S11. ------------------------------------------------- S11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE RCM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 31 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test E. See: Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S12. ------------------------------------------------- S12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE OCSM DISABLED Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2729 NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 46 (7.5A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test F. See: Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S13. ------------------------------------------------- S13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A) and 29 (5A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test C. See: Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuses. If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to S14. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to S15. ------------------------------------------------- S14 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test R. See: Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S15. ------------------------------------------------- S15 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS MODULE AND THE ACCM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2730 - Disconnect: BJB Fuse 47 (10A) and SJB Fuse 27 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. For non-hybrid, GO to Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool For hybrid, GO to S16. No INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to S17. ------------------------------------------------- S16 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: ABS Module C1155 . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the ABS module. GO to Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the ABS module. For non-hybrid, an intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test K. See: Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool For hybrid, GO to S17. ------------------------------------------------- S17 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE TCM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: BJB Fuses 5 (10A) and 24 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test H. See: Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test T. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2731 Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - ABS module - Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid) - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - PCM - Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped) - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) - Restraints Control Module (RCM) - Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid) PINPOINT TEST T: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- T1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE - Ignition OFF. - Inspect Data Link Connector (DLC) pins 6 and 14 for damage. - Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK? Yes GO to T2. No REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2732 ------------------------------------------------- T2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to T3. No GO to T5. ------------------------------------------------- T3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T4. No GO to T23. ------------------------------------------------- T4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 6 volts? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2733 The HS-CAN has tested within specifications. GO to Pinpoint Test S to test for an intermittent network fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently ------------------------------------------------- T5 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms? Yes GO to T6. No GO to T9. ------------------------------------------------- T6 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PCM C175b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms? Yes GO to T7. No GO to T8. ------------------------------------------------- T7 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - For non-hybrid, measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2734 - For hybrid, measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-43, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- T8 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2735 ------------------------------------------------- T9 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T11. No GO to T10. ------------------------------------------------- T10 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN AT THE DLC - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5 minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test. ------------------------------------------------- T11 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PCM C175b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T12. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2736 CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35. ------------------------------------------------- T12 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ABS Module C155 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T13. If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T14. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T36. ------------------------------------------------- T13 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T14. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T37. ------------------------------------------------- T14 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE RCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: RCM C2041b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2737 Yes GO to T15. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T38. ------------------------------------------------- T15 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE OCSM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: OCSM C3285 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to T16. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to T17. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T39. ------------------------------------------------- T16 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: APIM C3338 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T17. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T40. ------------------------------------------------- T17 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2738 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with a PAM, GO to T18. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PAM, GO to T19. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41. ------------------------------------------------- T18 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PAM C4014 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T19. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T42. ------------------------------------------------- T19 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PSCM C2231a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV), GO to T20. If the vehicle is not an HEV, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T43. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2739 ------------------------------------------------- T20 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: TCM C1458a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T21. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T44. ------------------------------------------------- T21 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. - Disconnect: BCM C4227a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to T22. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T45. ------------------------------------------------- T22 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ACCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ACCM C1469a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2740 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T46. ------------------------------------------------- T23 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PCM C175b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35. No GO to T24. ------------------------------------------------Part 2 Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - 4X4 control module (if equipped) - ABS module - Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2741 - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) - PCM - Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped) - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) - Restraints Control Module (RCM) - Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid) PINPOINT TEST T: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- T24 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ABS Module C155 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T36. No If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T25. If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T26. ------------------------------------------------- T25 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T37. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2742 GO to T26. ------------------------------------------------- T26 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE RCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: RCM C2041b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T38. No GO to T27. ------------------------------------------------- T27 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE OCSM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: OCSM C3285 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T39. No If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to T28. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to T29. ------------------------------------------------- T28 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: APIM C3338 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2743 Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T40. No GO to T29. ------------------------------------------------- T29 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41. No If the vehicle is equipped with a Parking Aid Module (PAM), GO to T30. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PAM, GO to T31. ------------------------------------------------- T30 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PAM C4014 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T42. No GO to T31. ------------------------------------------------- T31 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: PSCM C2231a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2744 - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T43. No For hybrid, GO to T32. For non-hybrid, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- T32 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: TCM C1458a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T44. No GO to T33. ------------------------------------------------- T33 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. - Disconnect: BCM C4227a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2745 - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T45. No GO to T34. ------------------------------------------------- T34 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ACCM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ACCM C1469a . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T46. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- T35 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T36 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect the ABS module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2746 Yes INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T37 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to Transfer Case. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T38 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the RCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T39 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION - Disconnect the OCSM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2747 Repeat the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T40 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION - Disconnect the APIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. Repeat the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. REPOWER the SRS. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- T41 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T42 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION - Disconnect the PAM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2748 test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T43 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PSCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new steering column. REFER to Steering Column. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T44 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step. - Disconnect the TCM low voltage connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the TCM low voltage connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new TCM. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T45 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step. - Disconnect the BCM low voltage connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the BCM low voltage connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2749 INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- T46 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACCM OPERATION NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step. - Disconnect the ACCM low voltage connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the ACCM low voltage connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently Established Normal Operation The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. In the event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (MS-CAN + or MS-CAN -) becomes open to a module on the network, unreliable network communication to all modules on the network may result. The following modules communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN: - Audio Control Module (ACM) - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped) - Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) - Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped) - HVAC module - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Smart Junction Box (SJB) This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors PINPOINT TEST U: INTERMITTENT NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED NOTE: Various modules set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear DTCs from all modules after the diagnostic procedure is completed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2750 NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- U1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC. - Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage. - Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK? Yes GO to U2. No REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- U2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to U3. No GO to Pinpoint Test V. See: Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- U3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2751 CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U4. No GO to Pinpoint Test V. See: Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------- U4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 6 volts? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No GO to U5. ------------------------------------------------- U5 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE SJB DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 5 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test Q. See: Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U6. ------------------------------------------------- U6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE HVAC MODULE DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuses 37 (10A) and 15 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test L. See: Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2752 INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to U7. ------------------------------------------------- U7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 39 (20A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test P. See: Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U8. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U9. ------------------------------------------------- U8 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test R. See: Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U9. ------------------------------------------------- U9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM, FDIM AND/OR GPSM DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuse 14 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. For vehicles equipped with an FDIM only, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test N. See: Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool For vehicles also equipped with an FCIM and/or a GPSM, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U10. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2753 INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U13. ------------------------------------------------- U10 VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - FCIM - Inspect the vehicle for an FCIM. - Is the vehicle equipped with an FCIM? Yes GO to U11. No GO to U12. ------------------------------------------------- U11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: FCIM C2402 . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the FCIM. GO to Pinpoint Test O. See: Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the FCIM. GO to U12. ------------------------------------------------- U12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: GPSM C2300 . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes CONNECT the GPSM. GO to Pinpoint Test M. See: Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No CONNECT the GPSM. GO to Pinpoint Test N. See: Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool ------------------------------------------------- U13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results. - Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) and 43 (10A) . - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test . Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2754 - Repeat the network test. - Do all other modules pass the network test? Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test C. See: Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool No INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test V. See: Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Audio Control Module (ACM) - Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped) - Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped) - Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) - Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped) - HVAC module - Instrument Cluster (IC) - Smart Junction Box (SJB) PINPOINT TEST V: PINPOINT TEST U: NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- V1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC). - Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage. - Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2755 Yes GO to V2. No REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- V2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms? Yes GO to V3. No GO to V5. ------------------------------------------------- V3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V4. No GO to V19. ------------------------------------------------- V4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2756 - Is the voltage greater than 6 volts? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The Controller Area Network (CAN) has tested within specifications. GO to Pinpoint Test U to diagnose the intermittent MS-CAN fault. See: Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent ------------------------------------------------- V5 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms? Yes GO to V6. No GO to V9. ------------------------------------------------- V6 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms? Yes GO to V7. No GO to V8. ------------------------------------------------- V7 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2757 harness side. - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- V8 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side. - Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2758 REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- V9 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to V11. No GO to V10. ------------------------------------------------- V10 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5 minutes. REPEAT the Pinpoint Test. ------------------------------------------------- V11 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: SJB C2280b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with a Global Positioning System Module (GPSM), GO to V12. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2759 If the vehicle is not equipped with a GPSM, GO to V13. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27. ------------------------------------------------- V12 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: GPSM C2300 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to V13. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V28. ------------------------------------------------- V13 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: FDIM C2123 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to V14. If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to V15. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V29. ------------------------------------------------- V14 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: FCIM C2402 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2760 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to V15. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V30. ------------------------------------------------- V15 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ACM C240b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to V16. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to V17. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V31. ------------------------------------------------- V16 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: APIM C3338 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to V17. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V32. ------------------------------------------------- V17 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE HVAC MODULE Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2761 DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to V18. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V33. ------------------------------------------------- V18 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34. ------------------------------------------------- V19 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: SJB C2280b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2762 If the vehicle is equipped with a Global Positioning System Module (GPSM), GO to V20. If the vehicle is not equipped with a GPSM, GO to V21. ------------------------------------------------- V20 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: GPSM C2300 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V28. No GO to V21. ------------------------------------------------- V21 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: FDIM C2123 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V29. No If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to V22. If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to V23. ------------------------------------------------- V22 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: FCIM C2402 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2763 Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V30. No GO to V23. ------------------------------------------------- V23 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: ACM C240b . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V31. No If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to V24. If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to V25. ------------------------------------------------- V24 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: APIM C3338 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V32. No GO to V25. ------------------------------------------------- V25 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE HVAC MODULE DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2764 - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V33. No GO to V26. ------------------------------------------------- V26 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED - Disconnect: IC C220 . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms? Yes CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- V27 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V28 CHECK FOR CORRECT GPSM OPERATION - Disconnect the GPSM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2765 - pushed-out pins - Connect the GPSM connector and make it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new GPSM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. Repeat the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V29 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION - Disconnect the FDIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new FDIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V30 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION - Disconnect the FCIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new FCIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V31 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION - Disconnect all the ACM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2766 - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V32 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION - Disconnect the APIM connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. Repeat the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V33 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION - Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new HVAC module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. ------------------------------------------------- V34 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2767 Yes INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. . ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool Communications Network Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The scan tool is connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC) to communicate with the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) and Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). A loss of ground or poor ground at the DLC may result in HS-CAN or MS-CAN faults while the scan tool is connected. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DLC - Scan tool PINPOINT TEST W: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- W1 CHECK DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE - Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC. - Inspect the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 for damage. - Are the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 OK? Yes GO to W2. No REPAIR the DLC as necessary. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2768 ------------------------------------------------- W2 CHECK THE DLC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-16, circuit SBP20 (GN/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to W3. No VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 20 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- W3 CHECK THE DLC GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable . - Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-4, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side and ground; and between the DLC C251-5, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes REPAIR the scan tool. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2769 Information Bus: Programming and Relearning Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Not Available Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2770 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) NOTE: If a new Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) is being installed, install the new APIM before carrying out the following procedure. For additional information, refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. NOTE: Do not disconnect the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) or USB cables during APIM programming. Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the "Program APIM" button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if prompted. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to program the VIP. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2771 - When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically. 9. The Sync/ APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays "Programming has been completed successfully". 10. Test the audio system for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2772 Information Bus: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2777 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2778 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2781 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2782 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2783 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2784 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2785 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2786 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2790 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2791 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2798 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2799 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor. Typical MAP Sensor Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2801 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2809 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2810 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2811 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2812 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2813 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2816 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2817 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2818 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical HO2S Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2821 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2824 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2825 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2830 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2834 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Control Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2839 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming instructions, if necessary. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step clears DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This makes sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body (ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions. Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster (IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2843 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1) ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2844 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2845 APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2867 Engine Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2868 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2869 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2870 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2871 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2872 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2873 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2874 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2875 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2876 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2877 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2878 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block are displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Neutral Profile Correction In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is reset. Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been completed. To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any misfire DTCs. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2881 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM. 5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged. Installation 1. Install the PCM cowl seal. 2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2882 4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt. 5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset 7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2886 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2887 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2892 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2893 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2897 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2898 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2899 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2900 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2901 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure. Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2909 Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2914 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2915 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2918 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2919 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2920 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2921 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2929 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2933 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2934 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2935 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2936 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2937 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2938 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2939 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946 Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2947 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software Typical CHT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2951 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2952 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside. 2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2957 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2958 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2959 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2960 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2964 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2965 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Typical In-tank FTP Sensor Typical In-line FTP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2969 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2970 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2971 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2972 Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2977 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2978 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2981 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2982 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2983 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2984 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2985 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2986 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2990 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2991 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2992 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor. Typical MAP Sensor Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2993 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. Typical EOT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3001 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3002 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3003 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3004 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3005 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3008 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3009 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3010 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Typical HO2S Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3013 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3016 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3017 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor Catalyst Monitor Sensor Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS. - Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3022 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3026 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3031 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3035 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3036 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3037 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3038 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3039 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3040 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3041 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3046 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling. Typical VSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3051 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3055 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3056 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3057 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3058 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3059 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3060 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3061 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage TSB 11-2-9 02/07/11 BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010 FORD: 2010-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are present. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage. a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure. b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms. a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7842006 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3088 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3089 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3090 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information. For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP, throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3091 couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. VCT System Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 3096 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 3097 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3098 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid Removal and Installation 1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine. 2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3103 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling. Typical VSS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor Only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the sensors after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. Typical V-Engine Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3108 Typical In-Line Engine Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency A TWC requires a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of gasoline (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. For vehicles using E85 the required air/fuel ratio is 9.8:1. Other gasoline/ethanol mixtures require a variable air/fuel ratio between 14.7:1 to 9.8:1 dependent on the percentage of ethanol content. TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart Exhaust System The exhaust system conveys engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3109 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view. Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold Catalytic Converter - 2.5L Manifold, Hybrid Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe. 3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts. 4. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connectors. 5. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold nuts. 6. Remove the catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle. - Discard the catalytic converter manifold gasket. 7. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold studs. 8. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. Installation 1. Install the 7 new catalytic converter manifold studs. - Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. Using a new gasket, install the catalytic converter and the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. Tighten in 2 stages in the sequence shown. - Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Connect the HO2S and the CMS electrical connectors. 4. Install the 2 exhaust bracket bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Install the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3112 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View Exhaust System - Exploded View 2.5L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3113 3.0L (View 1 of 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3114 3.0L (View 2 of 2) 2.5L Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3115 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3116 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody Catalytic Converter - Underbody Removal NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction. NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2.5L vehicles 2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector. All vehicles 3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts. 4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur to the resonator flange studs. NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side. Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts. 5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe. Do not pry under the gasket or damage to the flange may occur. Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly. - Remove and discard the gaskets. 2.5L vehicles 6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3117 3.0L vehicles 7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. 2.5L hybrid vehicles 8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration. Installation NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur. NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger insulators as required. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. 1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section. 2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3118 3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage. - If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s). NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 4 and 5. 4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange. 5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7. 6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange. 7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in the resonator flange. Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange. - Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3119 8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time. Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers. 9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand. 10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary. Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand. 12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). - Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3129 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3135 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3136 Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3137 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3138 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve. The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. For E-Series, Escape/Mariner, Expedition, F-Series, Fusion 2.5L, Fusion 3.0L, Milan and Navigator, the PCM outputs a duty cycle between 0% and 100% to control the EVAP canister purge valve. For all others, the PCM outputs a variable current between 0 and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve. Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve > Page 3142 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Check Valve ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Check Valve The EVAP canister purge check valve is used on turbocharged engines to prevent boost pressure from forcing open the EVAP canister purge valve and entering the EVAP system. The valve is open under normal engine vacuum. The valve closes during boost conditions to prevent the fuel tank from being pressurized and hydrocarbons forced out of the EVAP system into the atmosphere through the EVAP canister vent valve. When the engine is off, or at atmospheric pressure, the EVAP canister purge check valve is in an indeterminate state. The EVAP canister purge check valve is an integral part of the purge valve assembly. Typical EVAP Canister Purge Check Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3143 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve 2.5L Engine 3.0L Engine Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3144 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the EVAP canister purge valve. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3153 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's Evaporative Emission Control Canister: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's TSB 11-3-22 03/16/11 DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13. 2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in the evaporative emission canister? a. No - Proceed to Step 3. b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to step 3. 3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr. Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3159 110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs. Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C915 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3160 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3161 3. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister. 5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3165 WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Position the Powertrain Lift under the fuel tank. 4. Remove the bolt and position the LH fuel tank strap aside. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 5. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly. 6. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor. Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Leak Detection Valve: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3172 Leak Detection Valve: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3174 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission Canister See: Evaporative Emission Control Canister/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector, release the pin-type retainer and remove the EVAP canister wire harness. 3. Remove the 3 EVAP canister tray bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3175 4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 5. Disconnect the EVAP canister fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Remove the EVAP canister from the tray. 7. Depress the locking tab outward, rotate the EVAP canister vent solenoid clockwise and remove it from the EVAP canister. 8. NOTE: Do not apply oil to the EVAP canister O-ring seal. Clean water may be applied to aid reassembly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Solenoid The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to the atmosphere. At 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Tube: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Orifice Tube Assembly The EGR orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. EGR Orifice Tube Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations EGR Valve: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3186 EGR Valve: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the valve against the motor opening force. EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3189 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at ignition on. The system provides the PCM with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal that is identical to a traditional differential pressure feedback EGR system. ESM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3190 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.4 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures. Typical EGR Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3191 EGR Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 4. Release the clamp and remove the coolant hose from the EGR valve. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 6. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve gasket. NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and prepare the surfaces NOTE: Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket. Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket. - Clean and inspect the EGR gasket mating surfaces. 7. NOTE: Install a new EGR valve gasket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3192 To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3196 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Separator: Service and Repair Crankcase Vent Oil Separator Removal and Installation 1. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 2. Release the coolant bypass hose from the clip. 3. NOTE: Remove and discard the crankcase vent oil separator gasket. Remove the 8 bolts, the crankcase vent oil separator. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. - Install a new crankcase vent oil separator gasket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3208 Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3213 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3214 All vehicles 7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP module fuse. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal 2.5L and 3.0L Vehicles 2.5L Hybrid Vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3221 Removal and Installation All vehicles NOTE: The accelerator pedal and sensor assembly on the 2.5L and 3.0L are similar in appearance to the 2.5L Hybrid but are not interchangeable. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2.5L and 3.0L vehicles 2. Remove the 3 self-tapping screws and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2.5L Hybrid vehicles 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). All vehicles 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3225 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3226 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams Air Filter Element: Diagrams Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3231 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3235 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3236 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3237 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3238 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3239 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Check Fuel Cap Indicator The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel System Pressure Release WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location 22. Remove the FP fuse. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse. 6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the engine. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Injector Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3251 Fuel Injector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3252 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings Spring Lock Couplings Disconnect WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube spring lock coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Insert the Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock coupling. 4. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3257 Connect 1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling. - Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil. 2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated. 3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3258 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling Quick Connect Coupling Disconnect - Type I WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type I 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3259 Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Disconnect - Type II WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling. 3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting. - Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3260 Connect - Type II 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting. 2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Release the lock tab into the latched position. 3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Disconnect - Type III WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3261 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage. Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab. 4. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully unlocked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to release the locking mechanism. 5. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type III 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing. Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3262 3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling. Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Disconnect - Type IV WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism. 4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. - Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling. - Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3263 Connect - Type IV 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube. 1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2. Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Disconnect - Type V WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector. NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes. NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Depress the legs of the retainer clip and position the clip in an outward position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3264 4. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type V 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and quick connect coupling O-ring seals. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip is fully seated and locked onto the tube by pulling on the quick connect coupling. Press the retainer clip into the quick connect coupling body until flush and the legs are locked in place. 3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome light does not affect the FP module control. The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump. Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi) lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379 kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3269 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)............................................................................................................... .........................................................379 kPa (55 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3274 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Pressure Test WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Vehicles with 2.5L engine 3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling. 6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3275 All vehicles 7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system pressure. Install the FP module fuse. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool. Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3279 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3280 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3281 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail Fuel Rail Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 4. Disconnect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Remove the nut and position the radio capacitor aside. 6. Detach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers from the fuel rail. 7. Remove the 2 fuel rail stud bolts. 8. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 9. Remove the 4 fuel injector retainer clips and the 4 fuel injectors. - Remove and discard the 8 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. NOTE: Install 8 new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the 4 fuel injectors and the 4 retainer clips on the fuel rail. 2. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 3. Install the 2 fuel rail stud bolts. - Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Attach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers to the fuel rail. 5. Position the radio capacitor and install the nut. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3286 6. Connect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Connect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3287 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View Fuel Rail Fuel Injector Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3288 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3293 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3294 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3295 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Lines Fuel Lines 2.5L 3.0L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3296 Hybrid Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3297 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Hybrid vehicles 4. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure. When disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes, carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube spring lock coupling. 2.5L and 3.0L vehicles 5. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure. When disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes, carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. All vehicles 6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3298 7. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 9. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 10. Release the fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel supply and vapor tubes. 11. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister. 12. Release the 3 pin-type retainer clips and remove the fresh air tube. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3304 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3305 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3306 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 3.0L have an anti-siphon grate incorporated in the fuel tank filler pipe assembly. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 5. Remove the information bezel. 6. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 7. Remove the LR wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 8. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 9. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 10. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube and insulator from the frame rail. 11. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3311 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3314 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3315 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3316 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3317 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Unit: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3321 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3324 Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3334 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3335 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3336 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Typical IFS Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3337 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Intake Air System Components - Exploded View Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe Intake Air Resonator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3342 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3343 Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Air Cleaner Intake Pipe Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the bolt and the Air Cleaner (ACL) intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3344 Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. 2. If equipped, disconnect the vacuum tube from the ACL outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness retainer. 4. Loosen the 2 clamps and remove the ACL outlet pipe. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 5. NOTE: The ACL outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3348 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3349 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3354 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3355 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3356 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Control Module Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur. Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3360 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3361 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair Resonator: Service and Repair Intake Air Resonator Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the LF wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 3. Remove the 9 fasteners and position aside the LH fender splash shield. 4. Remove the bolt and the air intake resonator. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Make sure that the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3369 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3370 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Typical 2-Track APP Sensor 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. Typical 3-Track APP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3374 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3375 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3376 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3377 Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3378 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome light does not affect the FP module control. The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump. Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi) lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379 kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3383 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Typical FRPT Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3390 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3391 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3392 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Typical IFS Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3398 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 Throttle Body: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 TSB 09-23-5 11/30/09 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan, Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009? a. Yes - proceed to Step 2. b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines. 2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr. Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3407 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 TSB 09-23-5 11/30/09 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan, Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009? a. Yes - proceed to Step 2. b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines. 2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr. Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3413 Other Operations) 092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr. Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9E926 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3424 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the electrical throttle control electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Discard the Throttle Body (TB) gasket. Remove the 4 bolts and the TB. - Install a new TB gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3429 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Typical TP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below a calibrated RPM. The shutter is in the closed position to prevent airflow blend from occurring in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is energized above a calibrated RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................1-3-4-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3439 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3444 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3445 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3448 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3449 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3450 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3451 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3455 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3456 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3457 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3458 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3459 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3460 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3461 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3462 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3463 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3468 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3469 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3470 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3471 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3472 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3473 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3474 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3475 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3476 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP) ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Coil On Plug (COP) The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has 1 coil per plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure mode effects management (FMEM). For additional information, refer to Ignition Systems. See: Description and Operation/Ignition Systems Typical Coil On Plug (COP) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 3479 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Coil Pack The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed, voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil. The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as 1 spark plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and 6-tower series 5 models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4 and 2 and 3. When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Typical 4-Tower Coil Pack Typical 6-Tower Coil Pack Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3482 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil-On-Plug Ignition Coil-On-Plug Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 4 ignition coil electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 4 bolts and the ignition coils. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears. Remove and discard any damaged coil seals. - To install, slide the new coil seal onto the coil until fully seated at the top of the coil. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3487 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3488 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3491 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3492 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3493 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3494 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3495 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3496 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3502 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3503 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3506 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3507 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3508 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin Hall-effect type sensor. Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3509 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3514 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3515 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3516 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3517 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3518 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Typical CKP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3519 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3520 3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position. 4. Remove the engine plug bolt. 5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be at Top Dead Center (TDC). Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg. 6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor. Installation 1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur. Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3521 2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts. - Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner. - Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 6. Install the engine plug bolt. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown). - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3531 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3537 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3538 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3543 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3544 Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3547 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3548 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3549 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3550 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3551 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3552 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor (KS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine. 3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS). - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3557 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark plugs........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3558 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................AYSF-32-YPC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3559 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. - Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. - Install a new spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. - Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. - Correct the oil leak concern. - Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. - Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3560 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. - Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3563 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs Spark Plugs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug. 2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3570 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3573 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3574 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3575 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3576 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3577 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3578 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3579 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3580 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3581 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3582 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3583 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3584 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3585 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3586 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3587 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3588 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3589 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3590 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3591 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3592 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3593 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3594 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3598 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3601 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3602 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3603 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3604 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3605 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3606 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3607 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3608 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3609 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3610 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3611 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3612 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3613 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3614 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3615 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3616 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3617 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3618 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3619 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3620 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3621 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3622 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3626 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3629 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3630 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3631 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3632 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3633 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3634 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3635 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3636 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3637 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3638 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3639 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3640 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3641 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3642 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3643 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3644 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3645 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3646 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3647 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3648 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3649 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3650 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3655 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3656 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3667 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3668 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 3675 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3682 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3683 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3684 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3685 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3686 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3687 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3688 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3693 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3694 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3695 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3698 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3699 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3700 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3701 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3702 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3703 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3704 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3717 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3718 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3719 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3720 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3721 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3722 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3723 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3724 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3725 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3726 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3727 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3728 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3729 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3730 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3731 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3732 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3733 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3734 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3735 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3736 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3737 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3738 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3739 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3740 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3741 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3742 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3743 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3744 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3745 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3746 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3747 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3748 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3749 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3750 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3751 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3752 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3753 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3754 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3755 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3756 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3757 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3758 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3759 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3760 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3761 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3784 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3785 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3786 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3787 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3788 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3789 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3790 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3791 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3792 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3793 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3794 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3795 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3796 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3797 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3798 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3799 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3800 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3801 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3802 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3803 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3804 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3805 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3806 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3807 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3808 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3809 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3810 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3811 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3812 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3813 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3814 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3815 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3816 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3817 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3818 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3819 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3820 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3821 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3822 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3823 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3824 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3825 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3826 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3827 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3828 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3843 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3844 If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires October 31, 2010. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body. RENTAL VEHICLES In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage limit for this program. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3845 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Note: Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts. To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3846 In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts. Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. SERVICE PROCEDURE MODULE REPROGRAMMING NOTE: Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following: ^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected. ^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode. ^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection. ^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop. ^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended). If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram. 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3847 3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick. 6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed. A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions to program the PCM to the latest calibration. 7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage: ^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. ^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle and proceed to Step 8. TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST WARNING: Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C). Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the following: ^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine. ^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute. ^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute. ^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C). 9. Perform the Transmission Load Test: NOTE: Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct. 1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes. 2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped 3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm. 4. Place the gear selector in D. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3848 5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2. After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool the torque converter. 10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary. If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair. Table of Contents TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE Pan and Tool Requirements Transaxle Removal Transaxle Disassembly Main Control Valve Body Replacement Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly Filter Removal and Replacement Transaxle Assembly Transaxle Installation and Post Test Part and Tool Requirements TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3849 PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS NOTE: Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows: ^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent ^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566 ^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091 ^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 ^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 ^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent ^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 ^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 ^ Suitable Depth Gauge Transaxle Removal 1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM Section 307. Transaxle Disassembly If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website. If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle. If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make sure to select FSA on the main menu. 1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle. 2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566. 4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091. 5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle. 6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3850 Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1. 7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connectors. See Figure 2. 8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3. 9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3851 Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4. 10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. 2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3852 12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6. 13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7. 14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly. Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. 15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. 16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3853 17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8. 18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9. 19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. 20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3854 21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11. 22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. 23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12. 24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3855 25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14. 26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15. 27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16. 28. Remove the park pawl. 29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring goes up (flat side down). NOTE: The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3856 Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17. 30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring. 31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18. 32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3857 33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20. 1. No 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21. 35. Remove the center planetary sun gear. 36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3858 38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24. 39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25. 40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26. 41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch from the assembly. See Figure 27. 42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring. 43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28. 44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3859 Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29. 46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30. Main Control Valve Body Replacement Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3860 1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See Figure 31. 2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate from the new main control valve body. 3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts. See Figure 32. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3861 2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33. 3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33. 4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33. 5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on the balance piston. 6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See Figure 34. 7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3862 8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35. 9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36. 10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37. 11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3863 12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston. See Figure 38. 13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case. 14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch assembly. See Figure 39. 15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3864 16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly. See Figure 40. 17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly. See Figure 41. 18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place. 19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42. 20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3865 21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See Figure 43. 22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412 on the balance piston. 23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See Figure 44. 24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3866 25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45. 26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46. 27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47. 28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack. 29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. 30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3867 31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48. 32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. Filter Removal and Replacement 1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3868 2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and filter assembly. See Figure 50. 3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump. See Figure 51. 4. Remove the magnet from the filter. 5. Install the magnet on the filter. 6. Install the filter. A. Position the filter on the pump. B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees. 7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts. See Figure 52. A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3869 B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Transaxle Assembly 1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the main control cover sealing surface. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53. 3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly. 4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage to the transaxle can occur Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54. 5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3870 6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55. 7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56. 8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement. 9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3871 10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3872 11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the transaxle case step above the intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58. 12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm (0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack. 13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top. Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly. 15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly. 16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center support, the long support legs must fit through the low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC. Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59. 17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60. 18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case, temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3873 19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long support legs. See Figure 61. 20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3874 21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record this as measurement B. See Figure 63. 22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C. 23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case. 24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as measurement D. See Figure 64. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3875 25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge # 307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65. 26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F. 27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and 2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the low/reverse clutch pack. 28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top. Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back in the transaxle case. 29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3876 Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66. 1. Long center support legs face down. 2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case. 30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67. 1. No. 5 thrust bearing 2. No. 6 thrust bearing 31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68. 32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3877 33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69. 1. No. 7 thrust bearing 2. No. 8 thrust bearing 34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70. 35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70 36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 71. 37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack. 38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate. NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3878 Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72. 1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. 2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap. 40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3879 41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the transaxle case and position the plunger on the top forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74. 42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the transaxle case. See Figure 75. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3880 43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator. The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for correct assembly. See Figure 76. 44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly. 45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77. 46. Install the park pawl. 47. Install the park pawl pin and spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3881 48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78. 49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place. 50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole. 51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79. 53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. 54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3882 55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81. 56. Install the differential planetary sun gear. 57. Install the differential assembly. 58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82. 59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft. 60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface. 61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying silicone. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. 62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3883 1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft) 2. Stud bolt location 63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635. 64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case. See Figure 84. 1. Bypass valve. 2. Bypass valve sleeve 66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85. 67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide pin. 68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3884 Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86. 69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87. 70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3885 71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing up. Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. 73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 76. Position the main control cover in place. 77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 1. Bolt location 2. Stud bolt location 78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the torque converter. 79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091. 80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566. 81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625. Transaxle Installation and Post Test 1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307. 2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3886 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3887 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3894 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3897 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3898 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3899 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3900 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3901 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3902 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3903 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3904 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3905 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3906 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3907 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3908 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3909 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3910 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3911 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3912 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3913 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3914 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3915 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3916 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3917 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3918 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3922 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3925 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3926 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3927 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3928 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3929 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3930 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3931 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3932 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3933 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3934 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3935 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3936 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3937 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3938 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3939 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3940 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3941 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3942 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3943 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3944 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3945 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3946 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3950 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3953 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3954 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3955 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3956 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3957 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3958 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3959 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3960 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3961 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3962 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3963 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3964 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3965 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3966 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3967 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3968 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3969 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3970 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3971 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3972 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3973 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3974 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3979 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3980 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3986 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3989 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3990 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3991 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3992 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3993 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3994 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3995 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3996 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3997 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3998 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3999 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4000 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4001 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4002 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4003 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4004 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4005 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4006 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4007 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4008 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4009 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4010 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4014 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4017 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4018 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4019 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4020 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4021 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4022 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4023 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4024 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4025 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4026 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4027 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4028 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4029 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4030 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4031 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4032 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4033 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4034 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4035 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4036 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4037 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4038 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4042 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4045 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4046 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4047 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4048 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4049 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4050 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4051 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4052 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4053 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4054 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4055 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4056 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4057 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4058 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4059 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4060 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4061 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4062 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4063 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4064 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4065 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4066 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4071 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4076 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop Drive Chain: Customer Interest A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop TSB 10-20-1 10/25/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL CHARACTERISTIC. Drive Chain Replacement: 1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Install the holding fixture 307-625. 3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566. 5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091. 6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter from the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4085 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4086 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4087 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4088 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4089 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4090 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4091 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4092 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4093 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop TSB 10-20-1 10/25/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL CHARACTERISTIC. Drive Chain Replacement: 1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Install the holding fixture 307-625. 3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566. 5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091. 6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter from the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4099 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4100 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4101 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4102 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4103 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4104 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4105 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4106 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4107 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4112 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transaxle ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 9 quarts (8.5 liters) NOTE: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4115 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the in-line filter. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter. 4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes. 5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick disconnect fitting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4118 6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick disconnect fitting. 7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4119 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3 times. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times. After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4120 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Exchange Transmission Fluid Exchange NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Use the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to change the fluid. 3. Connect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to the transmission fluid cooler tube after the transmission fluid cooler on the return tube. This will help remove any foreign material trapped in the transmission fluid coolers. 4. Perform the transmission fluid exchange using the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. 5. Once the transmission fluid exchange is completed, disconnect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Reconnect any disconnected transmission fluid cooler tubes. 6. Using the scan tool with the engine running, check and make sure that the transmission is at normal operating temperature 66-77°C (150-170°F). Check and adjust the transmission fluid level and check for any leaks. If transmission fluid is needed, add transmission fluid in increments of 0.24L (0.5 pt) until the correct level is achieved. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. Tighten to..................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4124 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Main Control Cover 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4125 5. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 6. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4126 Installation 1. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. 2. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 3. Position the main control cover in place. 4. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4127 5. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 7. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers. 8. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4128 9. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing Technical Service Bulletin # 10C12 Date: 100521 Attachment I - Administrative Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4141 OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on May 21, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available on the website through May 21, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 21, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4142 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this recall is 50421. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide may not be present in the transmission. If the retaining pin is not present when the transmission is shifted into park, the park pawl rod guide may move out of position and not allow the park pawl to engage. Dealers are to inspect for the presence of the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide and install a retaining pin as necessary. INSPECTION WARNING: FAILURE TO APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 1. Inspect for the presence of the park pawl rod guide retaining pin located near the transmission barcode label on top of the transmission. The height of the retaining pin should be approximately 5 mm (1/4 in.) above the transmission housing boss. See Figure 1. ^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS PRESENT, no further inspection is necessary and this compliance recall is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4143 ^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS NOT PRESENT, continue to the service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE FUSION AND MILAN 1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01. ALL VEHICLES 2. Remove the selector lever cable bracket nuts and position the bracket aside. 3. Make sure that the park pawl rod guide is positioned correctly when installing a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin. a. Install a suitable tool, such as a small pick, into the retaining pin location to align the guide. See Figure 2. b. If the park pawl rod guide is out of position and can not be aligned, perform the following: 1. Install the guide with the retaining pin cut-out to the bottom of the guide. See Figure 3. 2. Using slight pressure, slide the guide inward until it stops Continue to apply slight pressure and rotate the guide COUNTER - clockwise first and then clockwise. This will allow the guide to align with the park pawl rod. 3. Make sure that the guide is aligned in the correct position by installing a suitable tool, such as a small pick into the guide retaining pin location. See Figure 2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4144 4. Install a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin with the tapered end downward. See Figure 4. ^ Tap the retaining pin in until 5 mm (1/4 in) remains above the transmission housing boss. 5. Install the selector lever cable bracket and nuts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). FUSION AND MILAN 6. Install the battery tray For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4145 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4146 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > NHTSA10V222000 > May > 10 > Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod Parking Pawl: Recalls Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Escape 2010 Ford/Fusion 2010 Mercury/Milan 2010 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: May 21, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V222000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 19 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2010 Fusion, Milan, and Escape vehicles manufactured from February 27, through March 26, 2010. The park rod guide retention pin may not have been properly installed which fails to conform to the requirement of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 114, "Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention". CONSEQUENCE: A vehicle parked without an engaged park pawl and without an applied parking brake may have unintended movement which may cause a crash. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will repair the vehicles free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about May 28, 2010. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-866-436-7332 and for the hearing impaired call 1-800-232-5952 (TDD). Representatives are available Monday through Friday: 8:00AM - 5:00PM. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10C12. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing Technical Service Bulletin # 10C12 Date: 100521 Attachment I - Administrative Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4156 OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on May 21, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available on the website through May 21, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by May 21, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4157 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this recall is 50421. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide may not be present in the transmission. If the retaining pin is not present when the transmission is shifted into park, the park pawl rod guide may move out of position and not allow the park pawl to engage. Dealers are to inspect for the presence of the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide and install a retaining pin as necessary. INSPECTION WARNING: FAILURE TO APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE DAMAGE AND/OR SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 1. Inspect for the presence of the park pawl rod guide retaining pin located near the transmission barcode label on top of the transmission. The height of the retaining pin should be approximately 5 mm (1/4 in.) above the transmission housing boss. See Figure 1. ^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS PRESENT, no further inspection is necessary and this compliance recall is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4158 ^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS NOT PRESENT, continue to the service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE FUSION AND MILAN 1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01. ALL VEHICLES 2. Remove the selector lever cable bracket nuts and position the bracket aside. 3. Make sure that the park pawl rod guide is positioned correctly when installing a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin. a. Install a suitable tool, such as a small pick, into the retaining pin location to align the guide. See Figure 2. b. If the park pawl rod guide is out of position and can not be aligned, perform the following: 1. Install the guide with the retaining pin cut-out to the bottom of the guide. See Figure 3. 2. Using slight pressure, slide the guide inward until it stops Continue to apply slight pressure and rotate the guide COUNTER - clockwise first and then clockwise. This will allow the guide to align with the park pawl rod. 3. Make sure that the guide is aligned in the correct position by installing a suitable tool, such as a small pick into the guide retaining pin location. See Figure 2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4159 4. Install a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin with the tapered end downward. See Figure 4. ^ Tap the retaining pin in until 5 mm (1/4 in) remains above the transmission housing boss. 5. Install the selector lever cable bracket and nuts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). FUSION AND MILAN 6. Install the battery tray For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4161 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > NHTSA10V222000 > May > 10 > Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod Parking Pawl: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Escape 2010 Ford/Fusion 2010 Mercury/Milan 2010 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: May 21, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V222000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 19 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2010 Fusion, Milan, and Escape vehicles manufactured from February 27, through March 26, 2010. The park rod guide retention pin may not have been properly installed which fails to conform to the requirement of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 114, "Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention". CONSEQUENCE: A vehicle parked without an engaged park pawl and without an applied parking brake may have unintended movement which may cause a crash. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will repair the vehicles free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about May 28, 2010. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-866-436-7332 and for the hearing impaired call 1-800-232-5952 (TDD). Representatives are available Monday through Friday: 8:00AM - 5:00PM. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10C12. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4169 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4172 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4173 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4174 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4175 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4176 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4177 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4178 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4179 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4180 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4181 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4182 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4183 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4184 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4185 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4186 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4187 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4188 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4189 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4190 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4191 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4192 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4193 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4202 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4203 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4209 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4210 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4211 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4212 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4213 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4214 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4215 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4216 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4219 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4220 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4221 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. 22. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual control lever shaft seal. Installation All vehicles 1. Using the Manual Lever Seal Installer, install a new manual control lever shaft seal. 2. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4222 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. 3. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 4. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4223 7. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 8. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 9. Position the main control cover in place. 10. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4224 12. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 13. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 14. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4225 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4226 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4227 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal Halfshaft Seal - RH, All Wheel Drive (AWD) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Transfer Case. 3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the RH transaxle differential seal. 4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4228 Installation 1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Installer. 2. Using the RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Installer, install the RH halfshaft seal. 3. Install the PTU. For additional information, refer to Transfer Case. 4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4229 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - LH Halfshaft Seal - LH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4230 4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Installation 1. Inspect the bushing surface on the LH halfshaft and the LH halfshaft bushing in the transaxle case for damage or excessive wear. If the LH halfshaft or the LH halfshaft bushing shows signs of excessive wear or damage, inspect the transaxle case for damage. Install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new LH halfshaft bushing. For additional Information, refer to Transaxle case bushing. If the LH halfshaft or the LH halfshaft bushing shows signs of excessive wear or damage but the transaxle case does not, install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new LH halfshaft bushing. For additional Information, refer to Transaxle case bushing. - If the transaxle case is damaged, install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new transaxle case. For additional Information, refer to Transaxle - 2.5L See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal or Transaxle - 3.0L See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal and Transaxle See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly. - If the bushing is not damaged or worn excessively, clean the area behind the seal and install a new seal following this procedure. 2. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Differential Seal Installer and Handle. 3. Using the Differential Seal Installer and Handle, install the LH halfshaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4231 4. Install the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 5. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. For additional information, refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4237 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4244 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4245 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4246 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4247 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4248 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4249 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4250 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4255 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4256 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4257 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4260 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4261 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4262 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4263 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4264 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4265 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4266 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4271 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4272 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4273 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4274 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4275 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4276 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4277 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4278 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4279 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4280 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4281 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4282 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4283 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4284 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4285 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4286 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4287 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4288 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4292 Shift Interlock: Service and Repair Brake Shift Interlock Override NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key. 2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel. Remove the access panel. 3. Using a suitable tool, depress the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA) override mechanism on the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL. 4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4296 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4299 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4300 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4301 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4302 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4303 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4304 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4305 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4306 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4307 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4308 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4309 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4310 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4311 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4312 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4313 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4314 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4315 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4316 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4317 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4318 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4319 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4320 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shifter A/T: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4324 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Removal All vehicles 1. Place the selector lever in the D position. 2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4325 3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. 4. Remove the top finish panel. 5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever. 1. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4326 2. Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console. 10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4327 All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 2. Install the 2 center console screws. AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever. 1. Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever. 2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4328 5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever. 6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly. 1. Install the selector lever cable on the bracket. 2. Connect the selector lever cable end. 7. Install the top finish panel. 8. Install the center console compartment tray. 9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4329 10. Adjust the selector lever cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Cable: Service and Repair Selector Lever Cable Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Place the selector level in the D position. 3. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. 4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4334 5. Remove the top finish panel. 6. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube. 9. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4335 10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Torque Converter: Description and Operation Torque Converter The torque converter transmits and multiplies torque. The torque converter is a 4-element device: - Impeller and cover assembly - Turbine - Reactor - Clutch and damper assembly Rotation of the torque converter housing and impeller set the transmission fluid in motion by driving the impeller blades and pump. The turbine is driven by the transmission fluid from the impeller and transmits power to the input shaft. The reactor redirects transmission fluid flow returned from the turbine to the impeller so that it rotates in the same direction as the impeller. This action assists in torque multiplication. The reactor has a One-Way Clutch (OWC) to hold it stationary during torque multiplication and allows it to rotate at higher vehicle speeds. Torque Converter Operation The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) connects the torque converter housing to the damper when the TCC is applied. During TCC release, the direction that the transmission fluid flows through the torque converter allows the TCC to release. During TCC apply, the transmission fluid flows in the opposite direction to apply the TCC. The PCM controls TCC operation using the TCC solenoid in the solenoid body. TCC solenoid operation provides the modulation of hydraulic pressure to change the position of the TCC control valve and TCC regulator apply valve which changes the pressure and transmission fluid direction in the torque converter. The TCC can be applied in 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4339 Torque Converter Internal Component Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter Diagnosis Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque converter. Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows: 1. Preliminary inspection 2. Know and understand the customer concern 3. Verify the concern - carry out the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test See: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test 4. Carry out diagnostic procedures: - Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD). Refer to Diagnostics See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostics. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first. - Repair all transmission DTCs. - Rerun OBD to verify repair. - Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Line Pressure Test - Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Stall Speed Test - Carry out diagnostic routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines - Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque converter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4342 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly. 1. Carry out Self Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs. 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D) position. 4. If the vehicle stalls in (D) at idle with the vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to manual L position. If the vehicle stalls, see torque converter operation concerns, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in (D), refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4343 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection 1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following statements is true: - A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures. - The torque converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged. - The torque converter exhibits external discoloration (due to overheating). - There is evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following transmission or converter failure modes. Major metallic failure - Multiple clutch plates or band failures - Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination - Water or antifreeze contamination 2. If none of the above conditions are present, continue with the following fluid inspection. 3. Pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white tissue or through a paper filter. 4. Examine the fluid for contaminants, color and smell. The fluid must be free of contaminants, red in color and not have a burnt smell. 5. NOTICE: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque converter or transmission damage will occur. If the fluid passed inspection: - drain the remaining fluid from the torque converter. - using only the recommended transmission fluid, add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean fluid into the converter and agitate by hand. - thoroughly drain the fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4347 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4350 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4351 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4352 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4353 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4354 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4355 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4356 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4357 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4358 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4359 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4360 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4361 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4362 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4363 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4364 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4365 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4366 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4367 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4368 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4369 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4370 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4371 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications 6F35 - Material 6F35 - General Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4376 Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4377 Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation Transaxle Cooling The transmission fluid cooling system consists of the following: - Oil-To-Air (OTA) transmission fluid combo cooler - Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly - Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube - Transmission fluid cooler return tube These vehicles are equipped with an external transmission fluid cooler. The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser and cannot be serviced separately. The cooler is mounted in front of the engine radiator. This transaxle has an internal thermal bypass valve. When the transmission fluid is below normal operating temperature, transmission fluid bypasses the cooling system. When the transmission fluid is at or above normal operating temperature, the thermal bypass valve opens, allowing transmission fluid to travel from the transaxle through the cooler and back to the transaxle. The transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air. Transaxle Cooling Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Transaxle Cooling Inspection and Verification Transaxle Cooling Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install new components if a transmission fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). GO to Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling or GO to Symptom Chart NVH. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - NVH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4380 Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - NVH Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - NVH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4381 Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6F35 Transmission Fluid Cooler Transaxle Cooling When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material or band material may have been carried into the torque converter and transaxle fluid cooler. These contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the system before the transaxle is put back into use. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test NOTE: The selector lever linkage, selector lever cable adjustment, transmission fluid level and line pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle for selector lever linkage and selector lever cable adjustment and refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures for line pressure test. The transmission fluid must be above 82°C (180°F) for the cooler bypass to open to carry out this test. 1. Using a scan tool, run the engine to establish the correct transmission fluid temperature of 82°C (180°F). 2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from the transaxle filler tube. 3. Place funnel in the transaxle filler tube. 4. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler return tube (rear fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4382 6. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return tube and route other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the transaxle filler tube. 7. Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position. 8. When transmission fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of transmission fluid should be observed. "Liberal" is described as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is observed, the test is complete. 9. If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return tube and connect it to the converter outlet tube fitting (front fitting) on the transaxle case. 10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair the pump and/or the torque converter. If new transmission fluid cooler tubes need to be installed, refer to Transmission Cooler, A/T. 6F35 - Transaxle Cooling Transaxle Cooling Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition (All Vehicles) NOTICE: The vehicle should not be driven if the transmission fluid level indicator shows the transmission fluid below the minimum transmission fluid level mark or internal failure could result. If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid may need to cool down to obtain an accurate reading. The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range. Transmission Fluid Level Check NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 85°C-93°C (185°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 32 km (20 mi) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool. Under normal circumstances the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid leaking, the transmission fluid level should be checked. 1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever through each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position. 2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth. 4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transaxle filler tube until it is fully seated, then remove the indicator. The transmission fluid level should be within the crosshatch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4383 High Transmission Fluid Level A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. If an overfill reading is indicated, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. Low Transmission Fluid Level A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets. Flat Tow Fluid Level Recreational flat towing of the vehicle may require the transmission fluid to be set to a lower fluid level. This will prevent damage to the transmission. The transmission fluid level is within the normal operating range and will not require the transmission fluid level to be readjusted after recreational towing. Adding Transmission Fluid NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the transaxle filler tube with the selector lever in PARK and the engine idling. Do not overfill the transmission fluid. For transmission fluid type, refer to the Material chart. Transmission Fluid Condition Check 1. Check the transmission fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor. 3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4384 5. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom of the transmission fluid pan, repair the transaxle and clean the transmission fluid cooler tubes and the transmission fluid cooler. 6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler must be backflushed. Refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the in-line filter. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter. 4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes. 5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick disconnect fitting. 6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick disconnect fitting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4387 7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4388 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement 6F35 - Transmission Fluid Cooler Transmission Fluid Cooler 1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be serviced separately. If installation of a new transmission fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. 6F35 - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4389 Removal NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage. 1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 2. Remove the left side splash shield. 3. Release the transmission fluid cooler tube retaining clip and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the clip. 4. Compress the constant tension clamps and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler. 5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission. 6. Using the Transmission Cooler Line Disconnect Tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transaxle and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4390 Installation 1. If installing new transmission fluid cooler tubes, remove the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches and the retainer from the old transmission fluid cooler tubes and install them on the new transmission fluid cooler tubes. 2. Position the transmission fluid cooler tubes in place. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the transaxle by inserting the tube into the fitting until a click is heard/felt. Pull back to confirm connection is secure and install the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches. 3. Compress the constant tension clamps and install the transmission fluid cooler tubes on the transmission fluid cooler. 4. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the retaining clip and close the retaining clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4391 5. Install the left side splash shield. 6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4402 Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly and outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine 2. Install the Engine Support Bar and Adapters and support the engine and transaxle. Vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine 3. Remove the 2 upper radiator hose retainers from the radiator support and position aside the upper radiator hose. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4403 4. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector, remove the wiring harness retainer from the LH valve cover and position aside the wiring harness. 5. Remove the 2 retainers from the valve cover studs, remove the retainer from the main control cover stud and position aside the alternator power cable. 6. Install the Engine Lifting Bracket and the Universal Mounting Brackets on both cylinder heads. 7. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg and Adapters. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4404 8. Install the Engine Lifting Chain and Adapter and support the engine and transaxle. All vehicles 9. Remove the LH support insulator. 1. Remove the LH support insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 2. Remove the top LH support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the side LH support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the LH support insulator. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4405 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the rear cross brace. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4406 4. Remove the lower front insulator through bolt and the 2 cross brace bolts. 5. Remove the cross brace nut and remove the brace. Installation 1. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut. - Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 2. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace. - Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 3. Install the lower front support insulator through bolt for the mount. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4407 4. Install the rear cross brace and the 4 bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4408 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) similar. Vehicles equipped with AWD have a damper that is held on by the through bolt. Remove the lower support insulator. 1. Remove the lower support insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Remove the lower support insulator bolt and 2 nuts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 3. Remove the lower support insulator. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4412 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4413 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4414 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4415 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4416 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4417 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4418 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4423 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4424 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4425 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4428 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4429 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4430 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4431 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4432 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4433 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4434 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4439 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4440 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4441 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4442 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4443 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4444 Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4445 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4446 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4447 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4448 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4449 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4450 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4451 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4452 Valve Body: Service and Repair Main Control Valve Body Main Control Valve Body Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional Information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4453 3. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 4. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 5. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4454 8. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 9. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 10. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4455 12. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 13. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 14. Remove the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 15. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body assembly from the main control valve body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4456 Installation 1. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the solenoid body assembly onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control valve body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4457 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4458 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4459 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4460 16. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 17. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 18. If a new solenoid body is installed, the solenoid body strategy and solenoid body identification will need to be updated. For additional Information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy 19. If a replacement transaxle assembly is being installed or a new solenoid body is installed, the PCM will have to be reflashed with a new solenoid body strategy and identification data file. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4461 Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4462 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4463 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4464 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4465 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4466 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4467 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4468 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4469 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Clutch Disc: Procedures Clutch Disc Check 1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil. 2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with a slide caliper. 3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets. 4. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. 5. Check for wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth. 6. Check the clutch disc for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new clutch disc if necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4475 Clutch Disc: Removal and Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4476 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction surface. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. 7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. For additional information, refer to Engine. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation. - worn or loose facings. - warpage or loose rivets at the hub. - wear or rust on the splines. 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Installation 1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts. - Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4477 3. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Controls - Exploded View Clutch Controls - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View > Page 4486 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Clutch Master Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder. - Plug the brake master cylinder. - Plug the clutch master cylinder hose. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod. 4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting. - Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. 3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the engine air cleaner. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder. - Plug the clutch master cylinder. - Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Adjustments Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Clutch Pedal Freeplay Adjustment 1. Measure the clutch pedal travel. 1. Press the clutch pedal lightly by hand. 2. Measure the distance the clutch pedal travels. It should be 5-13 mm (0.20-0.51 in). If the measurement is not within specification, inspect, repair and/or replace the clutch pedal. If the measurement is within specification, check the clutch pressure plate for damage or wear. For additional information, refer to Clutch Pressure Plate Check See: Pressure Plate/Service and Repair/Procedures. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4496 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4501 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4502 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4503 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4506 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4507 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Pressure Plate: Procedures Clutch Pressure Plate Check 1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or discoloration should be removed with a fine emery cloth. 2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge. 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments. 4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4512 Pressure Plate: Removal and Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4513 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction surface. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. 7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. For additional information, refer to Engine. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation. - worn or loose facings. - warpage or loose rivets at the hub. - wear or rust on the splines. 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Installation 1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts. - Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4514 3. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. 5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 6. NOTE: After the transmission fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant to the threads. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. NOTICE: Use only clean transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 8. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug, removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4519 Install the fill plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 9. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH Differential Seals - LH Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4524 5. Remove the LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 6. Using the Slide Hammer and Input Shaft Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the LH differential seal. Installation 1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH Installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Handle, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Install the fill plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4525 - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front. NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4526 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH Differential Seals - RH Removal All Vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4527 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) 5. Remove the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 6. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Transfer Case. All Vehicles 7. Using the Slide Hammer and RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Remover, remove and discard the RH differential seal. Installation All Vehicles 1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH Installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Driver 32 Inch Handle, install the RH differential seal. AWD 2. Install the PTU. For additional Information, refer to Transfer Case FWD 3. Install the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. All Vehicles 4. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the drain plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4528 5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle. 6. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the fill plug hole. 7. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on the transaxle case. Install the fill plug. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front. NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Upper Transaxle Support Insulator - Upper Transaxle Support Insulator - Upper Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4533 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg Adapter, Engine Support Bar Adapter and Lifting Hook Adapter. 3. Remove the upper insulator bracket bolt, nut and the bracket. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4534 4. Remove the upper insulator. 1. Remove the upper insulator nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 2. Remove the upper insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten the bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4535 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Lower Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Removal and Installation Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4536 4. Remove the bolts and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Remove the lower insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 6. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 7. Remove and discard the engine support crossmember nut. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten the new engine support crossmember nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the 2 engine support crossmember bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. Remove the engine support crossmember. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4537 9. Remove the rear roll restrictor through bolt and remove the rear roll restrictor from the bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4538 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Rear Transaxle Support Insulator - Rear Transaxle Support Insulator - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the rear insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 3. Remove the rear insulator nuts and bolt. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4539 4. Remove the rear insulator studs. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Remove the rear insulator. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Cover: Service and Repair Differential Housing Cover Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover. - Drain the differential fluid from the housing. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing cover are clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover. 2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly cured. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration. 3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts. - Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Remove the filler plug and fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm (0.118-0.196 in) below the bottom of the filler hole. Install the filler plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Axle Fluid Capacity Rear Axle ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L ) Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4548 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Seal Stub Shaft Seal Removal 1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. Use the Torque Converter Fluid Seal Remover and Slide Hammer to remove the stub shaft seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease. Using the Front Axle Oil Seal Installer and Handle, install the stub shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4553 2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4554 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal Drive Pinion Seal Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange. 3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft. Disconnect the rear driveshaft U-joint flange. - Remove and discard the 4 bolts. - Position aside the driveshaft and flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4555 4. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut. - Remove and discard the pinion flange nut. 5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange. 6. Using the 2 Jaw Puller, remove the pinion flange. 7. Using the Converter Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the pinion seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal. Using the Pinion Drive Seal Installer, install the pinion seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4556 2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with grease. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange. 3. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install a new pinion nut. - Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft). 4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and U-joint flange. - Install the 4 new bolts. - Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4566 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4567 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4573 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4574 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Axle Shaft Assembly: Mechanical Specifications Front Drive Halfshafts Torque Specifications Rear Drive Halfshafts Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4577 Axle Shaft Assembly: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts Halfshaft Joint Halfshaft Joint The front drive halfshaft CV joints consist of the following components: - Inner CV joints - Outer CV joints - CV joint boot clamps - Convoluted CV joint boots - Tripod joint housings - Ball and cage housings - Retainer circlips - Special CV high temperature grease The halfshaft joint allows for smooth rotation of the interconnecting shaft and the outboard housing. It also adjusts for length requirements as the vehicle goes through jounce and rebound. The halfshaft joints are not repairable and are serviced as assemblies only. Halfshaft Front Drive Halfshafts The halfshafts and intermediate shaft consists of the following components: - Inner CV joints - Outer CV joints - A support bearing on the intermediate shaft The shafts are serviced as assemblies only. The front drive halfshafts are splined to drive the front wheel hubs. The LH halfshaft uses a circlip to retain the inner CV joint stub shaft in the differential side gear. The RH halfshaft is connected to an intermediate shaft with a circlip. The intermediate shaft is also driven by a differential side gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4580 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts Rear Drive Halfshafts The rear drive halfshafts have the following features: - The inner and outer CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together. - The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length. - An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear. - A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV joint) to the rear hub. - The rear halfshafts are serviced as assemblies only. The rear drive halfshafts are driven by the differential side gears in the rear drive axle. The splined inner CV joint housing transfers the torque to the connecting shaft through the flexible joint consisting of caged balls or 3 roller trunion. This allows the connecting shaft to change both length and angle while the joint housing remains fixed. The CV joints are lubricated with a special high temperature grease that is contained by flexible rubber boots sealed to the joint housing and connecting shafts by clamps. The outer CV joint receives the rotational force from the connecting shaft and in turn, drives the rear wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4581 Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rear Drive Halfshafts For information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly &/or Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts Halfshaft Halfshaft NOTE: RH halfshaft shown, LH similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4584 Removal All halfshafts 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 3. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 5. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut. 6. NOTICE: Use care when releasing the lower arm and wheel knuckle into the resting position or damage to the ball joint seal and/or Constant Velocity (CV) joint boot may occur. Separate the lower arm from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. Left halfshaft 8. Using the Halfshaft Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the LH halfshaft from the differential. Right halfshaft 9. Using a brass drift to strike the RH halfshaft in the indicated area, separate and remove the halfshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4585 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4586 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts Halfshaft Halfshaft Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4587 Removal NOTICE: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer Constant Velocity (CV) joint. Damage to the CV joint will occur. NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Damage to the halfshaft may occur. NOTICE: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Damage to the halfshaft or Constant Velocity (CV) joints may occur. NOTICE: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Damage to the halfshaft boots will occur. NOTICE: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without evidence of external damage. 1. Remove the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. 4. Remove and discard the 4 stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts. 5. NOTE: Support the wheel knuckle. Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint. 6. NOTICE: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the differential. NOTE: Support the halfshaft inner joint. Using the Halfshaft Remover Tool, remove the halfshaft from the differential. 7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the rear wheel hub assembly. - Remove the halfshaft. Installation 1. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4588 2. Using the Axle Seal Protector, install the halfshaft into the differential. 3. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are correctly aligned. 4. Position the lower ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the rear coil spring. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension. 6. Install the 4 new stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts. - Tighten the lower bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - Tighten the upper bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 7. Install the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4597 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4598 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4604 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4605 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4606 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4607 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4608 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108 A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal TSB 10-21-11 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4609 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part List and Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that are not required for this repair. Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly. 2009-2010 Escape And Mariner 1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. 2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component damage may occur. 3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4610 4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2) 5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot. 6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod joint. 7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot clamp. 8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in (20 mm). Remove the screwdriver. 9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent, install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3) 2010 Fusion And Milan 1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for wear. a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4611 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs. Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A428 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4616 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4617 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4618 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD) Removal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4619 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. 2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. 4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press. - Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. - Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4620 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Center Support: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4634 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Center Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4640 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4649 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration TSB 11-2-19 02/28/11 AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/13/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26 degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2. 1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. 2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4655 110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs. Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4656 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation Driveshaft NOTICE: All driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the driveshaft to prevent overspray of any undercoating material or an unbalanced condition may occur. The driveshaft consists of: - spot-welded balance weights. - a front CV joint at the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). - a center support bearing assembly with a ground strap. - staked and snap ring type U-joints. - U-joint cap straps for the center U-joint. - square flanged rear U-joint. The driveshaft is a 2-piece shaft which transfers the rotational torque from the PTU to the rear drive axle. The driveshaft uses CV joints, U-joints and a center support for consistent operation through varying lengths and angles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures Driveline Angle Measurement Driveline Angle Measurement NOTE: This procedure does not apply to CV joints, flex couplers or double cardan joints that are used in some driveshafts. This check is for single-cross and roller-style joints found in the driveshafts. NOTE: Prior to checking driveline angularity, inspect the U-joints for correct operation. NOTE: An incorrect driveline angle can cause a vibration or shudder. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Noise, Vibration, and Harshness. NOTE: Driveline angularity is the angular relationship between the engine crankshaft, the driveshaft and the rear axle pinion. Factors determining driveline angularity include ride height, rear spring and engine mounts. All vehicles 1. Carry out the following preliminary setup steps: - Inspect the U-joints for correct operation. - Park the vehicle on a level surface such as a drive-on hoist, or back onto a front end alignment rack. - Verify the curb position ride height is within specifications with the vehicle unloaded and all of the tires are inflated to their normal operating pressures. - Calibrate the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor by placing it on a clean, flat level section of the frame rail and press the ALT-ZERO button. Vehicles with flat-flanged, split-pin or slip-flanged U-joints 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the snap ring to allow access to the base of the U-joint cup. Make sure the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor is seated against the U-joint cup. NOTE: Rotate the driveshaft until the flange U-joint cup is parallel with the floor. This will simplify taking measurements. To check the U-joint operating angle, install the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor. Check and record the flange angle as angle A. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4659 3. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the connecting component. Record the measurement of the component angle as angle B. Multiple piece driveshafts 4. NOTE: Repeat this step for each center support bearing on the driveshaft. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the U-joint snap ring, if equipped, for these measurements. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the components in front and behind the center support bearing U-joint in the area indicated. Record the front component as angle A and the rear component as angle B. All vehicles 5. NOTE: When 2 connected components slope in the same direction, subtract the smallest number from the larger number to find the U-joint operating angle. When 2 connected components slope in the opposite direction, add the measurements to find the U-joint operating angle. Calculate the difference in the slope of the components to determine the U-joint operating angle. - The U-joint operating angle is the angle formed by 2 yokes connected by a cross and bearing kit. Ideally, the operating angles on each connection of the driveshaft must: be equal or within one degree of each other. - have a 3 degree maximum operating angle. - have at least one-half of one degree continuous operating angle. 6. If the angle is not within specifications, repair or adjust to obtain the correct angle. Inspect the engine mounts, transmission mounts, center support bearing mounting, rear suspension, rear axle, rear axle mounting or the frame for wear or damage. Driveshaft Runout and Balancing Driveshaft Runout and Balancing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4660 Driveshaft Inspection NOTE: Driveline vibration exhibits a higher frequency and lower amplitude than high-speed shake. Driveline vibration is directly related to the speed of the vehicle and is noticed at various speeds. Driveline vibration can be perceived as a tremor in the floorpan or heard as a rumble, hum or boom. NOTE: Refer to Specifications for all runout specifications. 1. NOTE: Do not make any adjustments before carrying out a road test. Do not change the tire pressure or the vehicle load. Carry out a visual inspection of the vehicle. Operate the vehicle and verify the condition by reproducing it during the road test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Visual Inspection - The concern should be directly related to vehicle road speed, not affected by acceleration or deceleration or could not be reduced by coasting in NEUTRAL. 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. - The driveshaft should be kept at an angle equal to or close to the curb-weighted position. Use a twin-post hoist or a frame hoist with jackstands. 3. Inspect the driveshaft for damage, undercoating or incorrectly seated U-joints. Rotate the driveshaft slowly by hand and feel for binding or end play in the U-joint trunnions. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. Inspect the slip yoke splines for any galling, dirt, rust or incorrect lubrication. Clean the driveshaft or install new U-joints as necessary. Install a new driveshaft if damaged. After any corrections or new components are installed, recheck for the vibration at the road test speed. - If the vibration is gone, test drive the vehicle. - If the vibration persists or the driveshaft passes visual inspection, measure the driveshaft runout. Driveshaft Runout 1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Rotate the driveshaft by turning the axle and measure the runout at the front, the center and the rear of the driveshaft. If the runout exceeds 1 mm (0.040 in) at the front or center, install a new driveshaft. - If the front and center is within 1 mm (0.040 in), but the rear runout is not, index-mark the rear runout high point and proceed to Step 2. - If the runout is within 1 mm (0.040 in) at all points, recheck for vibration at road test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure. 2. NOTE: Circular pinion flanges can be turned in 90 degree or one-fourth increments. Half-round pinion flanges are limited to 2 positions. Index-mark the driveshaft to the pinion flange. Disconnect the driveshaft and rotate it 180 degrees. Reconnect the driveshaft. Recheck the runout at the rear of the driveshaft. - If the runout is still over specification, mark the high point and proceed to Step 3. - If the runout is within specification, check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is still present, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure. 3. Excessive driveshaft runout can originate in the driveshaft itself or from the pinion flange. To find the source, compare the 2 high points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4661 previously determined. If the index marks are close together, within 25 mm (1 in), the driveshaft is eccentric. Install a new driveshaft. - If the marks are on opposite sides of the driveshaft, 180 degrees apart, the slip yoke or pinion flange is responsible. Check the pinion flange runout. If the pinion flange runout exceeds specifications, a bent pinion is indicated. - If the pinion flange and pinion runouts are within specifications, road test and check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure. Driveshaft Balancing - Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) All vehicles 1. Install the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) to the vehicle. 2. Working under the vehicle, install an accelerometer. The accelerometer can be attached and mounted near either the transmission or differential end of the driveshaft. 3. Clean an area of the driveshaft and install the reflective tape, then install the photo-tachometer sensor. The sensor should be placed at approximately a 20-degree angle from perpendicular to the surface of the reflective tape. Make sure the sensor does not get moved during the balance procedure. 1. Reflective tape. 2. Photo-tachometer sensor. 4. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a driveshaft balance test with the driveshaft unmodified. Vehicles with tapped pinion flanges 5. Label the tapped holes in the pinion flange numerically, starting at the top hole as 1. Mark the remaining holes 2, 3 and 4. Label in the direction of rotation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4662 6. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a second test with the 12 mm (0.47 in) test weight set screw in the No. 1 hole, previously marked on the pinion flange. 7. Remove the test weight, then install the weight combination directed by the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Vehicles without tapped pinion flanges 8. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a second test with a test weight. Using a metal band, secure the test weight to the end of the driveshaft. The weight should be placed at the end of the driveshaft tube, as close to the tube-to-yoke weld seam as possible. Mark the location of the test weight on the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below. 1. Test weight. 2. Tube-to-yoke weld seam. 3. Driveshaft pinion flange. - Select the test weight based on driveshaft size. Larger driveshafts use 10 g (0.353 oz). Smaller driveshafts use 5 g (0.176 oz). 9. Remove the test weight, then install the recommended weight at the position directed by the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Using a metal band and epoxy, secure the test weight to the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below. 1. Test weight. 2. Measure in this direction. 3. Driveshaft diameter. 4. Directional rotation. 5. Balance weight relative to test weight centerline. - The results are displayed with respect to the location to where the test weight was placed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4663 All vehicles 10. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run a third test to verify the repair. Driveshaft Balancing - Hose Clamp Method 1. Install 1 or 2 hose clamps on the driveshaft, near the rear. Position of the hose clamp head(s) can be determined through trial and error. 2. Mark the rear of the driveshaft into 4 approximately equal sectors and number the marks 1 through 4. Install a hose clamp on the driveshaft with its head at position No. 1, as shown in the figure below. Check for vibration at road speed. Recheck with the clamp at each of the other positions to find the position that shows minimum vibration. If 2 adjacent positions show equal improvement, position the clamp head between them. 3. If the vibration persists, add a second clamp at the same position and recheck for vibration. 4. If no improvement is noted, rotate the clamps in opposite directions, equal distances from the best position determined in Step 2. Separate the clamp heads about 13 mm (1/2 in) and recheck for vibration at the road speed. 5. Repeat the process with increasing separation until the best combination is found or the vibration is reduced to an acceptable level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4664 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement Driveshaft Driveshaft Removal and Installation NOTE: The Escape Hybrid driveshaft is longer than the driveshaft in the Escape/Mariner and is not interchangeable. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the ground strap bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove and discard the 6 CV joint-to-Power Transfer Unit (PTU) flange bolts and 3 washers. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. 5. NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4665 occur. NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement cap strap bolts from the production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location. Remove and discard the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the driveshaft. 7. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts. Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 8. With the help of an assistant, remove the center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 9. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly &/or Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation Universal Joint: Description and Operation Universal Joints The center and rear joints consist of: - a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication. - equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement. - staked in place U-joints are not serviced individually. If worn or damaged, install a new driveshaft assembly. - snap ring type U-joints can be replaced if worn or damaged. The U-joints allow the speeding up and slowing down of the driveshaft as the angularity of the driveshaft changes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4669 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Driveshaft Universal Joint - Snap Ring Type Disassembly 1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. NOTICE: Do not, under any circumstance, clamp the driveshaft assembly in the jaws of a vise or similar holding fixture. Denting or localized fracturing may result, causing driveshaft failure during vehicle operation. Place the driveshaft on a suitable workbench. Do not damage the tube. 3. NOTE: If the components are not marked and therefore installed incorrectly, driveshaft imbalance can occur. Index-mark the driveshaft components. 4. Remove and discard all 4 of the snap rings. 5. Place the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover in a vise. 6. NOTE: If necessary, use a pair of pliers to remove a bearing cup that fails to press out all the way. Remove the bearing cups and the driveshaft slip yoke. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4670 1. Position the driveshaft slip yoke in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover. 2. Press out a bearing cup. 3. Rotate the driveshaft slip yoke 180 degrees. 4. Press on the U-joint spider to remove the remaining bearing cup. 5. Remove the driveshaft slip yoke. 7. Repeat steps to remove the remaining bearing cups and the U-joint spider from the driveshaft yoke. 8. NOTE: Inspect the bearing cup bores and retaining ring grooves. Remove any rust or other surface irregularities. Inspect the bearing cup bores of the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke. Make sure that the bearing cup bores are clean and smooth. Assembly 1. NOTE: Install the U-Joint Kits as complete assemblies only. Do not mix components from other U-Joint Kits. NOTE: Lubricate the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke bearing cup bores with grease before installing the bearing cups. Install a new U-joint spider and bearing cup. 1. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft yoke. - Check the needle bearings for correct positioning. 2. Position the new U-joint spider in the driveshaft yoke. 3. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, press the bearing cup to just below the snap ring groove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4671 2. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component can occur. Remove the shaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow snap ring. 3. Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft yoke. - If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings. 4. Install the driveshaft slip yoke and new bearing cup. 1. Align the index marks made during disassembly and install the driveshaft slip yoke on the U-joint spider. 2. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft slip yoke. - Check the needle bearings for correct positioning. 3. Position the assembly in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover. 4. Press the bearing cup to just below the snap ring groove. 5. Remove the driveshaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow snap ring. 6. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component can occur. Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft slip yoke. - If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings. 7. NOTICE: Do not strike the bearings or damage to the component can occur. A sharp rap on the driveshaft yoke with a brass or plastic hammer will seat the bearing cups. 8. Rotate the driveshaft yoke to make sure the U-joints are free to rotate easily, without binding, before installing the driveshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4672 9. Install the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .....................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to............................................................................... ..........................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Stage 3: Tighten to.............................................................................................................................................. .........................................112 Nm (83 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4676 Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection Flexplate Inspection 1. Inspect the flexplate for: 1. any cracks. 2. worn ring gear teeth. 3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Flex Plate: Procedures Flexplate Inspection 1. Inspect the flexplate for: 1. any cracks. 2. worn ring gear teeth. 3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4679 Flex Plate: Removal and Replacement Flexplate Flexplate Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the automatic transaxle. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. 3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flexplate. Installation 1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts. Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). - Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft). 2. Install the automatic transaxle. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal - Exploded View Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4680 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .....................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to............................................................................... ..........................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Stage 3: Tighten to.............................................................................................................................................. .........................................112 Nm (83 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4684 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur. NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur. 1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary. 2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. 6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate. - Discard the clutch disc. 8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary. - Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth. - Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth. 9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel. 10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4685 11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new dual mass flywheel if necessary. 12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction control plate is off center or damaged. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17. 13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. 14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel. 15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. 16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. 17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4686 18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal spring operation using the following Steps 19 through 21. 19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. 20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using the following Steps 23 and 24. 23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable. Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface. - Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4687 24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel should not be discarded based on this movement. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bushing for wear and install new as necessary. - Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass. - Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge. - Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass flywheel. 25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block. 1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new dowel pins as necessary. 2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new plates as necessary. 3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as necessary. 26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face. - Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged. 27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking compound or rust and clean as necessary. 28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts. Loosely install the dual mass flywheel. 29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4688 30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). - Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft). 31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Install the clutch disc and pressure plate. 32. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Flywheel: Procedures Flywheel Runout Check Flywheel Runout Check NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid. Use a dry cloth only or damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur. NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur. 1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary. 2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. For additional information, refer to the Flywheel Inspection procedure in Engine. Flywheel Inspection Flywheel Inspection NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur. NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur. 1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary. 2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. 6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate. - Discard the clutch disc. 8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary. - Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4691 of emery cloth. - Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth. 9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel. 10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. 11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new dual mass flywheel if necessary. 12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction control plate is off center or damaged. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17. 13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches. 14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel. 15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. 16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4692 17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel. 18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal spring operation using the following Steps 19 through 21. 19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. 20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise. The secondary mass should begin to engage the internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel. 22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using the following Steps 23 and 24. 23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable. Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4693 - Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts. 24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel should not be discarded based on this movement. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bushing for wear and install new as necessary. - Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass. - Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge. - Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass flywheel. 25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block. 1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new dowel pins as necessary. 2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new plates as necessary. 3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as necessary. 26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face. - Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged. 27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking compound or rust and clean as necessary. 28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts. Loosely install the dual mass flywheel. 29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4694 30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). - Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft). 31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material wear. Install the clutch disc and pressure plate. 32. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4695 Flywheel: Removal and Replacement Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal - Exploded View Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal Flywheel Flywheel Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the manual transaxle and clutch. For additional information, refer to Clutch, M/T and Manual Transmission/Transaxle. 3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flywheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4696 Installation 1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts. Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). - Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft). 2. Install the clutch and manual transaxle. For additional information, refer to Clutch, M/T and Manual Transmission/Transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transaxle ................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 2.4 quarts (2.3 liters) NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4707 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Part Number - XT-4-QGL Ford Specification - WSS-M2C203-A1 and GL-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4708 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. 5. Fill the transmission with gear oil through the fill level inspection plug hole, until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 6. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. - Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal Removal and Installation NOTICE: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed any time the halfshafts are removed. Failure to install new halfshaft seals may result in transmission oil leak(s). NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar. 1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 2. Using the Slide Hammer with the Bearing Cup Remover, remove the RH intermediate shaft oil seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4712 Installation 1. Using the Output Shaft Seal Installer, install the halfshaft oil seal. 2. NOTICE: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal protector may result in transmission oil leaks. Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Gearshift Lever Removal 1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. 2. Remove the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips. 4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever. 5. Remove the 4 gearshift lever nuts. 6. Remove the gearshift lever. Installation 1. Position the gearshift lever. 2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4721 3. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. 4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Adjust the gearshift cables. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. 6. Install the floor console finish panel. 7. Install the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4722 Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot Gearshift Lever Boot Removal and Installation NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob is one assembly. 1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console. 2. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot has been removed for clarity. Cut the gearshift lever knob crimp ring and discard. 3. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly. 4. NOTICE: A fully seated knob will conceal the knurled section on the gearshift lever. Failure to fully seat the gearshift knob may cause gearshift lever boot damage. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gearshift lever knob crimp ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Gearshift Cable Adjustment 1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console and push the mounting flange down through the console opening. 2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console. 3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud. 4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear, and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud. Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable. 5. With the shifter and the transmission in 3rd or 4th gear, engage the primary shift cable lock. 6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock. 7. Install the floor console finish panel. 8. Install the gearshift lever boot. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4727 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Gearshift Cables Removal 1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from the cable. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly. - Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees. 2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. 3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 4. Remove the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4728 5. Disconnect the Smart Junction Box (SJB) electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly. 7. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. 8. Remove the gearshift cables. - Pull the gearshft cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull the cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle. Installation 1. NOTE: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on the grommet is pointing down. Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel. 2. Connect the selector cable. 3. Connect the shift cable. 4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4729 5. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. 6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly. 7. Connect the SJB electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 8. Adjust the gearshift cables. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. 9. Install the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Manual Transmission Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL). For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Using the Engine Support Bar and Adapters, support the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4734 4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator. - To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Transaxle Front Support Insulator Transaxle Front Support Insulator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4735 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Using the Engine Support Bar and Adapters, support the engine. 3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 1. Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 2. Remove the splash shield screw. 3. Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut. - To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). - To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4736 4. Remove the crossmember. 4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4737 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through bolt and washer. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator. 6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle rear support insulator bracket. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Power Take-Off > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Take-Off: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Take-Off (PTO) Switch and Circuits The PTO circuit is used by the PCM to disable some of the OBD monitors during PTO operation. The PTO switch is normally open. When the PTO unit is activated, the PTO switch is closed and battery voltage is supplied to the PTO input circuit. This indicates to the PCM that an additional load is being applied to the engine. The PTO indicator lamp illuminates when the PTO system is functioning correctly and flashes when the PTO system is damaged. When the PTO unit is activated, the PCM disables some OBD monitors which may not function reliably during PTO operation. Without the PTO circuit information to the PCM, false DTCs may be set during PTO operation. Prior to an inspection/maintenance (I/M) test, operate the vehicle with the PTO disengaged long enough to successfully complete the OBD monitors. PTO Circuits Description The 3 PTO input circuits are PTO mode, PTO engage, and PTO RPM. The PTO engage circuit is used when the operator is requesting the PCM to check the needed inputs required to initiate the PTO engagement. The PTO RPM circuit is used when the operator is requesting additional engine RPM for PTO operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4749 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4750 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4757 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4764 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4765 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4766 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4767 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4768 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4769 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4770 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4775 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4776 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4777 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4780 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4781 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4782 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4783 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4784 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4785 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4786 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4796 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4797 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4801 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4802 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ........................................... 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4807 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (4X4) Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant. Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair Output Flange Removal NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles. 1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. 2. NOTICE: Rotational torque of the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange must be measured and recorded using a Nm (lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture to hold the flange, remove and discard the pinion nut. 3. NOTE: Index-mark the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange relative to the pinion spline. Using a suitable tool such as Snap-on(R) CJ2001, remove the PTU rear output shaft flange. Installation 1. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange to engage the spline as previously marked. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange. 2. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded with a Nm (in-lb) torque wrench. Overtightening the pinion nut will damage the collapsible spacer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4811 NOTICE: If the rotational torque is less than specification, tighten the drive pinion nut in small increments until it is within specification. Do not tighten the drive pinion nut more than 3 Nm (27 lb-in) or the collapsible spacer will be damaged. If the rotation torque is higher than specification, the collapsible spacer has been compressed too far and a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install a new pinion nut. 3. Install the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4816 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4817 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal Input Shaft Seal Input Shaft Seal 1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal. 2. Remove the bolt and the vent tube. 3. Remove the 12 bolts and the PTU cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4822 4. Remove the helical driven gear, idler gear and drive gear. 5. Using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust Shield Installer and Handle, remove the input shaft seal. 6. Clean the PTU sealing surface. Intermediate Shaft Seal Intermediate Shaft Seal 1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal. 2. Using the Halfshaft Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the intermediate shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4823 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation Input Shaft Seal Input Shaft Seal 1. Using the Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the input shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4824 2. NOTICE: Make sure not to roll the inner input seal sealing lip when installing the drive gear. Use a slight rotation to prevent damaging the inner input seal. Install the helical gears in the following sequence. 1. Install the drive gear. 2. Install the idler gear. 3. Install the driven gear. 3. NOTE: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of oil before applying new sealant. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant to the sealing surface of the PTU cover. Install the PTU cover and tighten the 12 PTU cover bolts in a star pattern. Tighten to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft). 4. Install the vent tube and the bolt. - Tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in). 5. Install the PTU. For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal. Intermediate Shaft Seal Intermediate Shaft Seal 1. Using the Handle and PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the intermediate shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4825 2. Install the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4829 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4830 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4837 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4840 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4841 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4842 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4843 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4844 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4845 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4846 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4847 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4848 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4849 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4850 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4851 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4852 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4853 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4854 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4855 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4856 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4857 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4858 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4859 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4860 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4861 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4865 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4868 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4869 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4870 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4871 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4872 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4873 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4874 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4875 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4876 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4877 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4878 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4879 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4880 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4881 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4882 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4883 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4884 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4885 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4886 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4887 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4888 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4889 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL position. CB = Clutch brake NC = Normally closed NH= Normally high NL = Normally low Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. Shift Solenoid A (SSA) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4893 Shift Solenoid B (SSB) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. Shift Solenoid C (SSC) Shift Solenoid D (SSD) a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids. b No engine braking. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) a No engine braking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe Solenoid Body Leadframe Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4896 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4897 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. Installation 1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. 2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4898 3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 4. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4899 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4900 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4901 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids Solenoids Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4902 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4903 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing the leadframe or damage can occur to the leadframe or the solenoids. Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly. 13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was removed from which bore in the solenoid body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4904 14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s). 15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body. Installation 1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage. 2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was removed. 3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D (SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an ON/OFF solenoid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4905 4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly. 5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the side of the solenoid. The band number is the third digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid. Install the solenoid in the solenoid body. 6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s). 7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4906 8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by pushing straight down into the solenoids. 9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins. 10. Install the 5 leadframe screws. 11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the main control cover grommet. 14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4907 15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 16. Position the main control cover in place. 17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4908 19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4909 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4910 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4911 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4912 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. 11. Remove the main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4913 14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body. Installation 1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4914 Install the main control. 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4915 7. Install the main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover or a transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4916 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4917 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. 17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy. 18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool box icon and select transmission. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body. 19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy. The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the information is not valid. The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file onto the scan tool. 20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not present, continue with this procedure. 21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server. The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network. 22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool. The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and display a message if it is downloaded successfully. 23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com. If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically be downloaded. 24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle. 25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool. 26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy fields from the solenoid body to the replacement solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing identification tag. The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4922 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4923 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4934 Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4935 Control Module: Service and Repair 4X4 Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4 control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4942 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Typical Stalk Mounted TCS Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 3.0L engine 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2.5L engine 3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. All vehicles 4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3.0L engine 5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield. All vehicles 6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4949 - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3.0L engine 8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside. 10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside. All vehicles 11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever. 12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever. 13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4950 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and bracket aside. 16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 17. Remove the main control cover grommet. 18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4951 19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring. 20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence. 1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the TR sensor. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle. Install the TR sensor. 1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case. 2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4952 2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in) extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt. - Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the main control cover grommet. 6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface. 7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4953 8. Position the main control cover in place. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4954 13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the manual control lever shaft or damage to the manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose. NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur. Install the manual control lever and the nut. - Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle. 3.0L engine 15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing. 16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing. All vehicles 17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4955 3.0L engine 18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers. 2.5L engine 19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3.0L engine 20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. All vehicles 22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts TSB 10-1-7 02/01/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main control lead frame connector. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid. a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose the OSS circuit b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair. 2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan. Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7. a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3. b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with normal diagnostics. 3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date. The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next three numbers are the day of the year. a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table 1) (1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame with a build date listed in the table. b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4960 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs. Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs. Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H103 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4961 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4962 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4965 7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the transaxle and position it aside. 8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover. 9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4966 11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control. 13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4967 Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Valve Body See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle separator plate. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Install the main control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4968 4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR) sensor wiring harnesses when installing the main control or damage to the sensors can occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet. 8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4969 9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case. 10. Position the main control cover in place. 11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. - Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4970 13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector. 14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud bolts. 15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4971 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers. 3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Angle Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair . 2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws. 3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws. 5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams Diagnostic Connector - ABS: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4987 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4988 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4989 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. Hybrid vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4990 2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). All vehicles 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if a new ABS module is being installed. Connect the scan tool and upload the module configuration from the ABS module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4994 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. If a new ABS module was installed, download the module configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 11. If a new ABS module and/or a new HCU was installed, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool directions. 12. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4998 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4999 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5000 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5005 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5006 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5007 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5010 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5011 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5012 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5013 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5017 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5018 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5019 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5020 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5021 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5022 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5027 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5028 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5029 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5030 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5031 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5032 NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5033 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Hydraulic Brake Actuation The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components: - Brake master cylinder - Brake pedal and bracket assembly - Brake tubes and hoses The hydraulic brake system is diagonally split with the LH front and RH rear brakes on one circuit and the RH front and LH rear brakes on the other circuit. Hydraulic Brake Actuation The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed from the master cylinder through the double-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses to the front brake calipers and rear wheel cylinders. The brake fluid enters the brake calipers and wheel cylinders, forcing brake pads and shoes outward against the brake disc/drum friction surfaces, slowing or stopping rotation. When the brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear brake components to the unapplied position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5037 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. 2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin. 3. Disconnect the accelerator pedal electrical connector. 4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper and lower nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5038 6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly. - Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the brake booster studs. 8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Brake Caliper Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5044 - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. 7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose. 8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper. Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5045 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip. 10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 11. Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Component Bleeding in Brakes and Traction Control. 12. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5046 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5047 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake pad minimum thickness.............................................................................................................. ........................................................3.0 mm (0.118 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View Brake Pad: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5053 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Brake Pads Removal WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir until it is half filled. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 3. NOTICE: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5054 5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 7. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary. For additional information, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Brakes and Traction Control. See: Testing and Inspection 10. NOTICE: Protect the piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the caliper piston bores or damage to the piston or boots may occur. If installing new brake pads, using a C-clamp and worn brake pad, compress the brake caliper piston into the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary. For additional information, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Brakes and Traction Control. See: Testing and Inspection Installation 1. Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake pad contact points on the anchor plate. 2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5055 Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 8. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. 9. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. - Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Disc minimum thickness............................................................................................................. ........................................................24 mm (0.944 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Disc Machining NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only. Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe. NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred. However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification, and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining. NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs. NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within specifications. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper. Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside, as required. - Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Install the hub adapter using: - four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub. - five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub. - six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub. - four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub. - five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub. 4. Install the cutting lathe. 5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). 6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer. 7. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish. Machine the brake disc. 8. Remove the lathe and the silencer. 9. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter. 10. Remove the metal shavings. 11. Measure the brake disc thickness. - If the measurement is below the minimum specification, install a new brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System. 12. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications. For additional information, refer to Specifications. Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly. - Install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5061 - For fastener torque specifications, refer to Disc Brake System. 13. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5062 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Brake Disc Brake Disc Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Anchor Plate See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Brake Caliper Anchor Plate. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Backing Plate: Service and Repair Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Wheel Cylinder See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable assembly through the backing plate. 4. Remove the rear wheel hub. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension. 5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate. - To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Brake drum maximum diameter........................................................................................................... ..................................................256.3 mm (10.090 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5070 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Removal 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can result. NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum between the wheel studs. If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes. 1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster. 2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes. 3. Remove the brake drum. Installation 1. Using the Brake Drum Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. - Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside face of the brake drum. 2. Adjust the rear brakes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle. 4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake shoe minimum thickness............................................................................................................ ........................................................1.0 mm (0.039 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5074 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Shoe Adjustment 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Brake Adjustment Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. 3. Position the Brake Adjustment Gauge on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5075 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes Removal and Installation WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce the possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this instruction may result in uneven braking and serious personal injury. 1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to remove glazing and to provide an equal friction surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins. 3. Remove the upper return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the lower return spring. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 7. Remove the leading brake shoe. - Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. - Apply a thin coat of the specified silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Adjustments. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Wheel Cylinder: Procedures Wheel Cylinder Lubrication 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 2. Remove the upper and lower return springs. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth movement. 8. Install the upper and lower return springs. 9. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5080 Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5081 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Disassembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5082 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel cylinder. 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the upper return spring. 3. Remove the lower return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. - Clean and dry the brake backing plate. 7. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 8. Remove the bleeder screw. 9. Remove the 2 dust boots. 10. Remove the 2 pistons. 11. Remove the 2 piston seals. 12. Remove the spring. 13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. Assembly 1. Install the spring. 2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals. 3. Install the 2 pistons. 4. Install the 2 dust boots. 5. Install the bleeder screw. 6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs. 9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5083 - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of smooth movement. 15. Install the lower return spring. 16. Install the upper return spring. 17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Master Cylinder Component Bleeding Master Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system. Hybrid vehicles 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5089 5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. - Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Non-hybrid vehicles 6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air bubbles. 9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. All vehicles 10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake System Bleeding. Brake Caliper Component Bleeding Brake Caliper WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5090 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Wheel Cylinder Component Bleeding Wheel Cylinder WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5091 - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5092 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5093 3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw. 7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. - Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. 11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw. Pressure Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5094 NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any components upstream of the HCU are installed new. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to pressure bleed this system. 1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap. - Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. - Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system. 4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw. - Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to Specifications. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. 8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow minimal force required to push through the gap. With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm. - If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any remaining air from the system. Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5095 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding. All vehicles 1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding. 2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions. 3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. Hybrid vehicles 4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Brake Caliper Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5100 - Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. 7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose. 8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper. Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. - Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5101 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. - Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip. 10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 11. Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Component Bleeding in Brakes and Traction Control. 12. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5102 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5103 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. - Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5110 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5111 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose Brake Flexible Hose Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5116 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Disc Brake System - Exploded View Disc Brake System - Exploded View Brake Flexible Hose Brake Flexible Hose Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5117 WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 4. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket. 5. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new retaining clip. - Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). All vehicles 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if a new ABS module is being installed. Connect the scan tool and upload the module configuration from the ABS module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5121 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. If a new ABS module was installed, download the module configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 11. If a new ABS module and/or a new HCU was installed, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence following the scan tool directions. 12. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Component Tests Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder. 3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage. Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy force. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak and a new brake master cylinder must be installed. If brake pedal height is maintained, reinstall brake tubes and tighten to specifications. Refer to Specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. Refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5126 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port Component Tests Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Apply and release the brakes. 3. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. - If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 4. - If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 4. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the brake booster. 6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. - If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist. - If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder. Refer to Hydraulic System, Brakes &/or Brake Pedal Assy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5127 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection Brake Pads Brake System Inspection Brake Pads NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined. 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brake pads. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front disc brakes. - If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake Shoes Brake System Inspection Brake Shoes 1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information, refer to Specifications. - Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes. - If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake shoes. - Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new hardware as necessary. - Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or install new as necessary. - Verify correct brake shoe adjustment. - For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Brake Discs Brake System Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5128 Brake Discs NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts. This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness. NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness. Record the measurement, refer to Specifications. - If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brakes. - If the measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brakes. - If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine, discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Procedures. Brake Drums Brake System Inspection Brake Drums NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues. 1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements, refer to Specifications. - If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum. - If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum. - Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate, should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter specification. - For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Wheel Cylinders Brake System Inspection Wheel Cylinders Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5129 1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Brake Calipers Brake System Inspection Brake Calipers 1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding. - If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brake calipers. Brake Caliper Guide Pins Brake System Inspection Brake Caliper Guide Pins 1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move, carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear, damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component. - Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake parts cleaner and compressed air. - Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins. - Inspect the brake pads. Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes Brake System Inspection Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result in brake tube failure. NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly double flared to provide Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5130 strong, leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be careful not to kink or crack the tube. 1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage. - If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of the same type, size, shape and length. - When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding. 2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any other signs of damage. - Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for the front brake flexible hose or Drum Brake System for the rear brake flexible hose. Brake Master Cylinder Brake System Inspection Brake Master Cylinder NOTE: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such as after brake application and release) will remain unchanged. Fluid level will decrease with pad wear. NOTE: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting flange. This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal. 1. Inspect the brake master cylinder for fluid leaks. - Install a new master cylinder or brake fluid reservoir if signs of excessive leaking are present. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic System, Brakes &/or Brake Pedal Assy. - To check for correct brake master cylinder operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Brake Booster Brake System Inspection Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for leaks and kinks. - Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found. For additional information, refer to Power Brake Assist. - Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary. - To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5131 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Component Tests Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles) 1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure tester to the booster side of the check valve. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. - Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level. Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed. - The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg). - If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4. 4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step 5. - If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition. 5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system. 6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts. - If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly. - If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist. 7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest. - If condition still exists, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist. - If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is functioning properly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from the brake fluid reservoir. - Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 3. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder ports. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten new nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5134 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for component bleeding. - If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5135 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from the brake fluid reservoir. - Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 3. Remove the reservoir. - Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir. - Pull the reservoir upwards. 4. Remove and discard the 2 seals. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid. - Bleed the master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5136 - If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Wheel Cylinder: Procedures Wheel Cylinder Lubrication 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 2. Remove the upper and lower return springs. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth movement. 8. Install the upper and lower return springs. 9. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5141 Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5142 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Disassembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5143 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel cylinder. 1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the upper return spring. 3. Remove the lower return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. - Clean and dry the brake backing plate. 7. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 8. Remove the bleeder screw. 9. Remove the 2 dust boots. 10. Remove the 2 pistons. 11. Remove the 2 piston seals. 12. Remove the spring. 13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. Assembly 1. Install the spring. 2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals. 3. Install the 2 pistons. 4. Install the 2 dust boots. 5. Install the bleeder screw. 6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs. 9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly. NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to piston seals. 10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5144 - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out. 13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston. - Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot. 14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3 times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of smooth movement. 15. Install the lower return spring. 16. Install the upper return spring. 17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair. - Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments. 18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Parking Brake Cable: Procedures Parking Brake Cable Tension Release 1. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 in) x 100 mm (3.93 in) retainer pin can be inserted. 2. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly. To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5150 Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar. Removal and Installation 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Procedures. 2. Remove the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 4. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5151 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Removal and Installation 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Procedures. 2. Remove the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 4. Compress the retaining clip and detach the parking brake cable from the exhaust support bracket. 5. Remove the parking brake cable bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5152 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the parking brake control. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Control See: Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 4. Remove the driver side front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 5. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by releasing the locking tab. 7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5153 8. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel. 2. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Cable Tension Release See: Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Procedures. 3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control cover. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 7. Remove the parking brake control. - Disconnect the front parking brake cable. 8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of fasteners. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5157 To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5161 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5162 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5163 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5168 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The power brake actuation system consists of the following components: - Brake booster - Brake booster check valve - Brake booster travel sensor (hybrid vehicles) - Brake booster vacuum sensor (hybrid vehicles) - Brake booster vacuum supply hose - Vacuum pump (hybrid vehicles) Conventional brake booster The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside the vacuum booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster rod opens a valve, allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off the opposite side. This increases pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum valve. This restores vacuum to both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original position. Active brake booster (hybrid vehicles) The active brake booster uses vacuum supplied by an engine-mounted electronic vacuum pump and is similar to a conventional vacuum assist brake booster with the addition of a brake booster (vacuum) solenoid, a brake booster travel sensor and a vacuum sensor. If it is necessary to apply the friction brakes, the ABS module will send a signal to the brake booster solenoid that is proportional to the amount of brake torque requested. The booster solenoid will open to allow vacuum to draw the booster diaphragm and push rod towards the master cylinder piston, building hydraulic pressure. The brake booster vacuum sensor is used by the ABS module to monitor vacuum maintained inside the brake booster. The brake booster travel sensor is used to monitor the performance of the brake booster. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5169 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster NOTE: Hybrid vehicle shown, gas vehicle similar. Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch. This switch must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5170 2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin. 3. Remove and discard the 4 brake booster nuts. - To install, tighten the new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster. Hybrid vehicles 5. Disconnect the vacuum sensor, booster solenoid and the booster travel sensor electrical connectors. All vehicles 6. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts. - To install, tighten new nuts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings. Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward and remove the brake booster. 8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch. This switch must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing this switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Hybrid vehicles 9. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair Brake Vacuum Pump Vacuum Pump - Hybrid Vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) coolant pump bolts and position the pump aside. - To install, tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 lower A/C compressor bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5174 - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 2 A/C compressor bracket bolts and the bracket. - To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the vacuum pump electrical connector. 6. Remove the vacuum pump bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. Remove the vacuum pump bracket bolt. - To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Position the vacuum pump to release the clamp, detach the vacuum hose and remove the vacuum pump. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5179 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5181 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. Hybrid vehicles 1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. Non-hybrid vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5182 2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). All vehicles 5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5187 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5188 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Angle Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair . 2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws. 3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws. 5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5195 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5196 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5197 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5201 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5203 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5208 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5209 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5210 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5213 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5214 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5215 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5216 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5217 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5220 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5221 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. - When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5222 - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5223 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal 1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. 2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5224 1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the previous illustration. 2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5225 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. - To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5232 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5233 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5234 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5237 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5248 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5254 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5255 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5260 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5261 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - 2.5L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5266 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery Disconnect See: Service and Repair/Battery Disconnect. 2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 4. Position the generator B+ terminal cable aside. 5. Disconnect the generator harness retainer. 6. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover. 7. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 8. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Position the starter motor terminals aside. 10. Remove the battery ground cable bolt. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 11. Position the battery ground cable aside. 12. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the left rear of the engine. 13. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the middle of the intake runners. 14. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the front of the engine. 15. Disconnect the clip retainer from the right front of the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5267 16. Disconnect the clip retainer from the left front of the engine. 17. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 18. Open the Battery Junction Box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 19. Position the BJB terminal aside. 20. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector. 21. Disconnect the retainers fastening the battery cables to the battery tray. 22. Remove the battery cables. 23. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5273 Alternator: Mechanical Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5274 Alternator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5275 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5276 Alternator: Description and Operation Charging System The charging system is a negative ground system consisting of: - a generator with an internal voltage regulator. - a charging system warning indicator. - a battery. - circuitry and cables. - a PCM. - a radial arm adapter (serviceable separately from the generator) The generator is driven by the accessory drive belt. When the engine is started, the generator begins to generate AC which is internally converted to DC. The DC is controlled by the voltage regulator (located on the rear of the generator) and supplied to the battery. The PCM controls the voltage regulation set point, working with the generator internal voltage regulator over 2 control and communication circuits. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5277 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - 2.5L Removal NOTICE: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage. NOTE: The radial arm adapter is a serviceable item. Do not replace the generator if the radial arm adapter is the only concern. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5278 2. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield. 4. Rotate the Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside. 5. Remove the battery harness locator from the lower generator stud. 6. Remove the generator bolt. 7. Remove the 2 generator stud nuts. 8. Working from the top of the vehicle, press the locking tab to release the generator lower air duct from the generator and remove the lower air duct. 9. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut. 10. Position the generator B+ cable aside. 11. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. 12. Remove the generator. 13. Remove the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct. Installation 1. Install the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, install the generator and the generator stud. 3. Install the 2 generator stud nuts hand-tight. 4. Install the generator B+ cable and install the generator B+ terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in). 5. Connect the generator electrical connector. 6. Position the generator B+ protective cover on the B+ terminal. 7. Working from under the vehicle, install the lower generator bolt hand-tight. 8. Tighten the 2 generator stud nuts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 9. Install the lower generator air duct. 10. Tighten the generator bolt. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 11. Rotate the FEAD belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive belt onto the pulleys. 12. Install the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 13. Position the harness locator on the generator stud. 14. Connect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5284 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5285 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5289 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5290 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5299 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5305 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5315 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5321 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5322 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column. 1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Key: Testing and Inspection Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure only works if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The Instrument Cluster (IC) PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the IC before the vehicle starts. If the MyKey(TM) function is enabled, one or both of the keys must be administrator (admin) keys. NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle. 1. Insert a programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the first key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the first key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the first key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the second key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the second key to the OFF position and remove the key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the second key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed PATS ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the new key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5327 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: "Ignition Key Code Erase". Follow all IDS on-screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE function does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5328 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC, of which only 4 can be IKT keys), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset NOTE: A minimum of 2 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) to complete this procedure and allow the vehicle to start. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics . 3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE: If the IC or the IC and the PCM were replaced, updated or reconfigured, follow Steps 4-9. All vehicle keys are erased during the parameter reset procedure. Verify at least 2 vehicle keys are available prior to carrying out the PATS parameter reset. If only the PCM was replaced, go to Step 9. From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 6. Turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds. 7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the key. 8. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds. 9. Both keys now start the vehicle. 10. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. 11. Program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) PATS keys. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5329 NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLE, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. NOTE: The key used in this step does not have to be an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key. A conventional Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key can also be used, as long as it has first been successfully programmed to this vehicle. Insert a programmed PATS IKT key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLE, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - "Customer Spare Key Programming Disable" - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5330 of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition key to OFF (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 8. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation. 12. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation. 9. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5331 If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key can be programmed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available. NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) can be determined by viewing the Instrument Cluster (IC) PID N_KEYCODE. 1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will be erased from the system. From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key". 4. NOTE: The 20-second delay is to allow sufficient time for the module to exit its diagnostic mode. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (wait 20 seconds). 5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5332 Key: Testing and Inspection MyKey(TM) MyKey(TM) Programming Program a MyKey(TM) NOTE: After a MyKey(TM) has been programmed, the remaining standard key(s) (the key[s] that is not programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature) is referred to as an "administrator key(s)" or "admin" key(s). There must always be at least one admin key. The Instrument Cluster (IC) does not allow the last admin key to be programmed into a MyKey(TM) restricted key. Both the admin key and the MyKey(TM) restricted key can be used to see how many MyKey(TM) and admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey(TM) feature active (using the message center). The MyKey(TM) is the one with the restricted status. The admin key does not have any restrictions. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was programmed. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If the key has been cycled, an admin key is required to disable the MyKey(TM) programming. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can only be configured or disabled with an admin key. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature allows you to program/configure a restricted driving mode on one (or more) standard key(s) supplied with the vehicle or any (Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)) programmed spare key(s) to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be programmed to a MyKey(TM) restricted key status. The MyKey(TM) is a restricted key for consecutive key cycles until the MyKey(TM) feature is disabled. When the MyKey(TM) feature is programmed, several features are modified/or can be modified: NOTE: The standard restricted features below cannot be configured in any way. Standard Restricted Features - Belt-Minder(R) chimes periodically with the audio system muted until the driver safety belt is buckled. If Belt-Minder(R) has been disabled when the admin key is in the ignition lock cylinder, Belt-Minder(R) still functions for the MyKey(TM) driver. Belt-Minder(R) cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver. - Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) low fuel warnings are issued when the Distance To Empty (DTE) value is reached (typically 75 miles). - The parking aid system (if equipped) cannot be turned off. NOTE: The optional restricted features below can be configured to the customer preferences. Refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features. Optional Restricted Features - If configured, the audio system limits the volume to 45% of the maximum volume. The message MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed if an attempt is made to exceed the volume limit of 45%. - If configured, vehicle maximum speed can be limited to 130 km/h (80 mph). Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the vehicle speed of 130 km/h (80 mph) is attained. The PCM automatically limits the vehicle speed to not exceed 130 km/h (80 mph). - If configured, audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the preselected vehicle speed of 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) is attained. - If configured, the AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature can be configured to on or off. If configured to always on, the traction control cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver when a MyKey(TM) is being used to operate the vehicle. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays. 1. NOTE: The key that is being programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature must first already be programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Insert a programmed PATS ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF to the ON position. This key must be the one that is being programmed to the MyKey(TM) restricted status. 2. Using the message center buttons: 1. Press the SETUP button until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY appears in the message center display. 2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY is displayed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5333 3. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately 2 seconds) until MARK THIS KEY AS RESTRICTED is displayed. 4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed, then release the RESET button. 3. The MyKey(TM) feature (standard restricted features) is successfully programmed into this particular key. Make sure it is labeled for easy identification. To customize the MyKey(TM) with the audio volume limited, maximum speed limit, speed alert chimes, and AdvanceTrac(R) on/off restrictions, refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features. If the vehicle is equipped with remote start, also refer to Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start Systems. Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features NOTE: The following features can be restricted on a MyKey(TM): - audio volume level set to a pre-determined level (45% of the maximum volume) - maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (80 mph) on or off - speed alert chimes set for 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) - AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature turned on or off 1. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays. To configure the MyKey(TM) optional restricted features listed directly above, carry out the following: 1. Using an admin key that has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM), turn the key to the ON position. 2. Press and hold the SETUP button until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed. 3. Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey(TM) setup menus. The first programmable feature is: MYKEY MAX MPH [80 MPH] OFF. To change the status of a feature that appears, press SETUP to accept the current setting and the message center displays the next feature. - To change the status of the feature that is displayed, press RESET to turn a feature on/off (or toggle between choices). After the feature selection has been made, press and release SETUP to accept and the message center displays the next feature. 4. Repeat the process for the next features: - MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 [OFF] (choose the desired speed for the chime to sound) - MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT [ON] OFF (choose the audio volume to be limited to 45%) - MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON [OFF] (choose for the AdvanceTrac(R) to be automatically locked on or able to be turned on or off by the MyKey(TM) driver) Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features 1. NOTE: This procedure is used to disable the MyKey(TM) feature on all of the keys that are programmed to the vehicle. All of the keys then operate as normal (admin) keys with no restrictions. Insert an admin key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position. 2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY appears. 3. Press and hold RESET until HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR and ALL KEYS ARE CLEARED is displayed. - A MyKey(TM) can also be cleared during the same key cycle that it was programmed by following Steps 2 and 3 of this procedure. Check MyKey(TM) System Status 1. The vehicle system check provides the status of the following MyKey(TM) parameters: - MYKEY DISTANCE - This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey(TM) is used. If mileage does not accumulate, the intended MyKey(TM) is not being used or the IC is at fault. The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling the MyKey(TM). If this odometer is lower than the last time it was checked, the MyKey(TM) system has been cleared. If desired, it may be necessary to program the MyKey(TM) restricted features into the key. - # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many MyKeys(TM) are programmed to the vehicle. It can also be used to determine if a MyKey(TM) has been disabled. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5334 - # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle. It can also be used to determine if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle. Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start System NOTE: The # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or the # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED messages that may be displayed in the message center includes the remote start system as an additional key in the total count, depending on whether or not it was programmed as a MyKey(TM). Refer to the Check MyKey(TM) System Status to determine if this is the case. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) system is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle and it is started using the remote start, the vehicle stalls if a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. The driver must insert their key into the ignition lock cylinder, cycle the ignition to the ON position and drive the vehicle with the MyKey(TM) restrictions that are programmed into their MyKey(TM). If the remote start system is a non-Ford approved system, the vehicle may not stall when a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. If the remote start system has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM) and the driver is a MyKey(TM) driver, the driver could possibly drive the vehicle using the remote start system as an admin key with no MyKey(TM) restrictions. To resolve this incompatibility, it is necessary to either recycle the MyKey(TM) before the vehicle is driven or program the non-Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey(TM). NOTE: It is possible to program all of the keys as MyKeys(TM), with the remote start system being the lone remaining admin key. In this particular case, it may be necessary to use the remote start system to clear all MyKeys(TM) and turn them into admin keys. In order to do this, carry out the following: - Enter the vehicle and close all doors. - Remote start the vehicle using the remote start fob. - Follow Steps 1-3 of the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure. 1. When using a Ford approved remote start system, the standard restricted features recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key. If the remote start system is not Ford approved, it may not operate correctly. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle, the remote start system can be programmed as a MyKey(TM), in addition to the key that is also programmed as a MyKey(TM). To program the remote start system as a MyKey(TM), follow the steps below: 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. 2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob. 3. Follow Steps 1-3 of the Program a MyKey(TM) procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Starter Motor: Electrical Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5339 Starter Motor: Mechanical Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5340 Starter Motor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5341 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5342 Starter Motor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5343 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - 2.5L Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the starter solenoid battery cable nut and disconnect the starter motor solenoid terminal cover and cables. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 6. Remove the ground wire nut and position aside the ground wire. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 7. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the starter motor. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5344 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5348 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5349 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5355 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Mechanical Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5356 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point, Console Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5359 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5360 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5361 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5362 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DC/DC Converter WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power from the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) to low-voltage (12 volts) DC power. This charges the 12-volt battery through the low-voltage battery cables and powers the low-voltage electrical systems, eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. It is controlled by the PCM and is located on the RF wheel housing. DC/DC Converter Wiring Harness WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. The DC/DC converter wiring harness supplies high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to the DC/DC converter from the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). Like all other high-voltage wiring, it is orange in color. The DC/DC converter wiring harness runs along the back of the engine underneath the engine cover and is a serviceable part. DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts low voltage (12 volts) DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC power with a rating of less than 150 watts. The DC/AC inverter is located underneath the floor console and is a serviceable part. The AC power point is located in the front of the floor console and can be serviced separately from the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems, charging the vehicle's 12-volt battery, and eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. The DC/DC converter is liquid-cooled and is part of the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS). In addition to the DC/DC converter, the MECS also provides cooling of the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). For more information on the MECS, refer to Transmission Cooler, A/T. Inspection and Verification High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Inspection and Verification WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5365 depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 6. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 7. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - verify the ignition is ON. - verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 9. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). 10. Carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM. 11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5366 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DTC Chart WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. PCM DTC Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5367 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Symptom Chart WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5368 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power Point High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power Point Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts. NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted. Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER AT THE AC POWER POINT NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side and ground. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible cause of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5369 ------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A3. No REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE AC POWER OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side. Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A4. No REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point C2292-2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5370 - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point C2292-1. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator Is Never On High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator is Never On Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key is in the ON position. The DC/AC inverter supplies 12 volts DC to the LED along circuit LYA03 (YE/VT). Ground is provided by the DC/AC inverter on circuit RYA03 (BU/BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5371 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to B2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to locate the possible cause of the circuit short. TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE LED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B. - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter C2293B-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B4. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5372 No REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED - Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6, component side in both directions. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the opposite direction? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM - 12-volt battery - Battery cables - DC/DC converter PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). - Are any PCM DTCs present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5373 For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information. No GO to C2. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Ignition OFF. - Refer to Battery and carry out Pinpoint Test A: Battery Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for use. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests - Did the battery pass the condition test? Yes GO to C3. No INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. REFER to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C4. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Start the engine. - NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time. - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the voltage at the 12-volt battery. - Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts? Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C5. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5374 C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter positive C1457C, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100A, post side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to C6. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter negative C1457B, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to C7. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors. - Check for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5375 operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13 High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13 Normal Operation The PCM controls the DC/DC enable hardwired signal to switch the DC/DC converter on and off. The DC/DC converter provides feedback to the PCM using the hardwired DC/DC fault signal. The DC/DC fault signal indicates to the PCM when the converter is non-operational or when a fault has occurred. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - DC/DC converter - High-voltage cable assembly - PCM - Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT) - DC/DC converter high-voltage wire harness - Wiring, terminals or connectors PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 AND P0A13 WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. NOTE: The 12-volt battery must be sufficiently charged before carrying out any DC/DC converter system diagnostics. NOTE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) must be at a minimum state of charge of 35% in order for the PCM to activate the DC/DC converter enable circuit in the KOER position. NOTE: DTC P0A09 set alone as a Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Code (CMDTC) indicates an intermittent DC/DC fault circuit failure or that battery voltage has dropped below a preset limit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5376 ------------------------------------------------- D1 REVIEW THE PCM DTCs - Review the DTCs retrieved and recorded during Inspection and Verification. Is DTC P0A7C or any other MECS DTCs present in the PCM? Yes REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information to diagnose those DTCs first. No GO to D2. ------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK FOR FAULT REPEATABILITY - Connect the scan tool. - Ignition ON. - Using the scan tool, clear the PCM DTCs. - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test - PCM. - Is DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 present? Yes GO to D3. No GO to D24. ------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Ignition OFF. - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to D4. ------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HVTB STATE OF CHARGE - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - BCM. - Using the Battery Pack State of Change (BSOC) PID, verify that the HVTB state of charge is greater than 35%. - Is the HVTB state of charge greater than 35%? Yes GO to D5. No The HVTB is under-charged. CARRY OUT a self-test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the HVTB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5377 ------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK IF THE ENGINE WILL START - Start the engine. - Test drive the vehicle over a short distance to verify that the engine starts. - Does the engine start? Yes GO to D8. No GO to D6. ------------------------------------------------- D6 MONITOR THE TCM HIGH-VOLTAGE CONTACTOR (CONTACT) PID - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - TCM. - Monitor the TCM CONTACT PID. - Does the PID indicate that the contactors are closed? Yes GO to D7. No The Battery Control Module (BCM) is unable to close the contactors. CARRY OUT a Self Test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the high-voltage system. ------------------------------------------------- D7 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY HIGH-VOLTAGE (HVBAT_V) PID - Monitor the TCM HVBAT_V PID. - Is the voltage between 216 and 400 volts? Yes GO to D8. No GO to D25. ------------------------------------------------- D8 VERIFY THE MECS COOLANT TEMPERATURE (MECT_V) PID - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - Monitor the PCM MECT_V PID. - Is the voltage less than 1.2 volts? Yes GO to D9. No The MECS may be overheating. REFER to the appropriate pinpoint test for DTC P0A7C in Computers and Control Systems Information. ------------------------------------------------- D9 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE DROP Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5378 - Start the engine. - With the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457C, positive post and 12-volt battery C1100A, positive post. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to D10. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- D10 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE DROP - With the engine still running, and with the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457B, negative post and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to D11. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- D11 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE DC/DC CONVERTER WIRING HARNESS - Turn off the headlights and heater blower fan. - Ignition OFF. - Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457D. - Disconnect: TCM C1458E. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side, and TCM C1458E-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5379 - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side, and TCM C1458E-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D12. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter wiring harness. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter Wiring Harness . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D12 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FOR AN OVER-CHARGING CONDITION - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457D. - Connect: TCM C1458E. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Repower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Ignition ON. - Measure the battery voltage and record. - Is the voltage less than 16 volts? Yes GO to D13. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D13 VERIFY CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Ignition OFF. - Measure the battery voltage and compare it to the value recorded in step D12. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5380 - Was the battery voltage at least 0.5 volts greater when the ignition was in the ON position? Yes If DTC P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 was retrieved, GO to D14. If DTC P0A08, P0A09 or P0A10 was retrieved, GO to D19. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D14 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: PCM C175T. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side, and PCM C175T-12, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D15. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D15 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side and ground. - Is any voltage present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5381 REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to D16. ------------------------------------------------- D16 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to D17. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D17 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Connect: PCM C175T. - Ignition ON. - Measure the battery voltage. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, disconnect the fused jumper wire between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground. - Does the battery voltage drop approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is connected (disabling the DC/DC converter) and increase approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is disconnected (enabling the DC/DC converter)? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5382 GO to D18. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D18 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER USING THE PCM DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE (DCE) PID - Ignition OFF. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - Measure the battery voltage. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, command the PCM DCE active command on and off. - Does the battery voltage increase and decrease in accordance with the cycling of the active command? Yes CLEAR the DTCs. GO to D19. No GO to D26. ------------------------------------------------- D19 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if not previously disconnected). - Disconnect: PCM C175B. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side, and PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D20. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D20 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5383 - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. - Is any voltage present? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to D21. ------------------------------------------------- D21 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to D22. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D22 CHECK THE PCM FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-67, circuit CBB29 (WH/VT), component side, and between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-68, circuit GD122 (BK), component side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5384 - Are the resistances between 1,000 and 2,000 ohms? Yes GO to D23. No GO to D26. ------------------------------------------------- D23 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE PCM - Connect: PCM C175B. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. Is the voltage less than 10.5 volts? Yes GO to D26. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D24 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN - Ignition OFF. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if previously disconnected). - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - While monitoring the PCM DCE and PCM DC/DC converter status (DCE_F) PIDs, carefully wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the circuit and monitor the PIDs for a change in state. - Do the PIDs indicate a concern while wiggling the harness or connectors? Yes REPAIR the affected circuit(s). Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid) for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5385 No The concern cannot be duplicated at this time. VERIFY the 12-volt battery is sufficiently charged. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D25 CHECK THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect: TCM C1458D. - Disconnect: BCM C4227B. - Measure the resistance as shown in the table below: - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new eCVT. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No INSTALL a new high-voltage cable assembly. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D26 CHECK THE PCM FOR CORRECT OPERATION - Ignition OFF. - (if not previously turned to the OFF position) - Disconnect: PCM C175B. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Check the PCM and DC/DC converter connectors for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - spread terminals. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Connect: PCM C175B. - Verify that each connector is correctly seated. - Carry out the PCM self-test and verify that the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. REPEAT the self-test. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5386 ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the console trim insert. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5389 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter. 4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt. - To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5390 6. Remove the DC/AC inverter. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5391 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point Power Point Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams Electronic Noise Suppressor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5395 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5400 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5401 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5402 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5406 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5407 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5412 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5413 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5414 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5415 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5416 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5419 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5420 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5421 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5422 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5423 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5424 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5425 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5426 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5427 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5428 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5429 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5430 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5431 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5432 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5433 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5434 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5435 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5436 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5437 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5438 Fuse Block: Connector Views Battery Junction Box (BJB) Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5439 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5440 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5441 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5442 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5443 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5444 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5445 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5446 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5447 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5452 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5453 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5454 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5455 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5456 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5457 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5458 C134 C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5459 C140 C210 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5460 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5461 C211 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5462 C212 C214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5463 C215 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5464 C237 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5465 C238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5466 C248 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5467 C263 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5468 C264 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5469 C311 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5470 C312 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5471 C313 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5472 C314 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5473 C316 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5474 C327 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5475 C339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5476 C340 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5477 C405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5478 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5479 C408 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5480 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5481 C410 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5482 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5483 C421 C422 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5484 C495 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5485 C914 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5486 C922 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5487 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5488 C913 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5489 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5490 C3007 C3133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5491 C3134 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5492 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B TSB 11-2-10 02/07/11 2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE CONCERN FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid. 1. Clear DTCs. 2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement. NOTE IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO ILLUMINATE. 3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return? a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required. b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6M280 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5520 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5521 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5522 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5541 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5542 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5543 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5548 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5549 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5550 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5551 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5552 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5555 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5556 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5557 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5558 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5559 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5560 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5561 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5562 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5563 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5566 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5567 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5568 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5573 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5574 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5575 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5576 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5577 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5580 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5581 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5582 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5583 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5584 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5585 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5586 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5587 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5588 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5591 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5592 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5593 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5599 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Mechanical Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5600 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point, Console Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5603 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5604 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5605 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5606 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DC/DC Converter WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power from the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) to low-voltage (12 volts) DC power. This charges the 12-volt battery through the low-voltage battery cables and powers the low-voltage electrical systems, eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. It is controlled by the PCM and is located on the RF wheel housing. DC/DC Converter Wiring Harness WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. The DC/DC converter wiring harness supplies high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to the DC/DC converter from the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). Like all other high-voltage wiring, it is orange in color. The DC/DC converter wiring harness runs along the back of the engine underneath the engine cover and is a serviceable part. DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The DC/AC inverter converts low voltage (12 volts) DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses AC power with a rating of less than 150 watts. The DC/AC inverter is located underneath the floor console and is a serviceable part. The AC power point is located in the front of the floor console and can be serviced separately from the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Principles of Operation DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet (utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used. DC/DC Converter The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery systems, charging the vehicle's 12-volt battery, and eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. The DC/DC converter is liquid-cooled and is part of the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS). In addition to the DC/DC converter, the MECS also provides cooling of the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). For more information on the MECS, refer to Transmission Cooler, A/T. Inspection and Verification High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Inspection and Verification WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5609 depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 6. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 7. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - verify the ignition is ON. - verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 9. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). 10. Carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM. 11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5610 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions High-Voltage Converter/Inverter DTC Chart WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. PCM DTC Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5611 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Symptom Chart WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5612 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power Point High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power Point Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts. NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted. Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER AT THE AC POWER POINT NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side and ground. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. - Are the voltages greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible cause of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5613 ------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A3. No REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE AC POWER OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side. Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A4. No REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point C2292-2. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5614 - Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point C2292-1. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator Is Never On High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED Indicator is Never On Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110 volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key is in the ON position. The DC/AC inverter supplies 12 volts DC to the LED along circuit LYA03 (YE/VT). Ground is provided by the DC/AC inverter on circuit RYA03 (BU/BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DC/AC inverter - AC power point PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5615 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to B2. No CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to locate the possible cause of the circuit short. TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B3. No REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE LED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B. - Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292. - Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter C2293B-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to B4. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5616 No REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED - Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6, component side in both directions. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the opposite direction? Yes INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM - 12-volt battery - Battery cables - DC/DC converter PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY ------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand and Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). - Are any PCM DTCs present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5617 For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information. No GO to C2. ------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Ignition OFF. - Refer to Battery and carry out Pinpoint Test A: Battery Condition Test to determine if the battery can hold a charge and is OK for use. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests - Did the battery pass the condition test? Yes GO to C3. No INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. REFER to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C4. ------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY - Start the engine. - NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time. - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the voltage at the 12-volt battery. - Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts? Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to C5. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5618 C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter positive C1457C, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100A, post side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to C6. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE - With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter negative C1457B, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to C7. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors. - Check for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. TEST the system for normal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5619 operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13 High-Voltage Converter/Inverter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13 Normal Operation The PCM controls the DC/DC enable hardwired signal to switch the DC/DC converter on and off. The DC/DC converter provides feedback to the PCM using the hardwired DC/DC fault signal. The DC/DC fault signal indicates to the PCM when the converter is non-operational or when a fault has occurred. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - DC/DC converter - High-voltage cable assembly - PCM - Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT) - DC/DC converter high-voltage wire harness - Wiring, terminals or connectors PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 AND P0A13 WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals. Do not use standard multi-meter probes. NOTE: The 12-volt battery must be sufficiently charged before carrying out any DC/DC converter system diagnostics. NOTE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) must be at a minimum state of charge of 35% in order for the PCM to activate the DC/DC converter enable circuit in the KOER position. NOTE: DTC P0A09 set alone as a Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Code (CMDTC) indicates an intermittent DC/DC fault circuit failure or that battery voltage has dropped below a preset limit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5620 ------------------------------------------------- D1 REVIEW THE PCM DTCs - Review the DTCs retrieved and recorded during Inspection and Verification. Is DTC P0A7C or any other MECS DTCs present in the PCM? Yes REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information to diagnose those DTCs first. No GO to D2. ------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK FOR FAULT REPEATABILITY - Connect the scan tool. - Ignition ON. - Using the scan tool, clear the PCM DTCs. - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test - PCM. - Is DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 present? Yes GO to D3. No GO to D24. ------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS - Ignition OFF. - Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection - Are any circuits causing excessive current drains? Yes REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to D4. ------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HVTB STATE OF CHARGE - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - BCM. - Using the Battery Pack State of Change (BSOC) PID, verify that the HVTB state of charge is greater than 35%. - Is the HVTB state of charge greater than 35%? Yes GO to D5. No The HVTB is under-charged. CARRY OUT a self-test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the HVTB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5621 ------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK IF THE ENGINE WILL START - Start the engine. - Test drive the vehicle over a short distance to verify that the engine starts. - Does the engine start? Yes GO to D8. No GO to D6. ------------------------------------------------- D6 MONITOR THE TCM HIGH-VOLTAGE CONTACTOR (CONTACT) PID - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - TCM. - Monitor the TCM CONTACT PID. - Does the PID indicate that the contactors are closed? Yes GO to D7. No The Battery Control Module (BCM) is unable to close the contactors. CARRY OUT a Self Test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the high-voltage system. ------------------------------------------------- D7 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY HIGH-VOLTAGE (HVBAT_V) PID - Monitor the TCM HVBAT_V PID. - Is the voltage between 216 and 400 volts? Yes GO to D8. No GO to D25. ------------------------------------------------- D8 VERIFY THE MECS COOLANT TEMPERATURE (MECT_V) PID - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - Monitor the PCM MECT_V PID. - Is the voltage less than 1.2 volts? Yes GO to D9. No The MECS may be overheating. REFER to the appropriate pinpoint test for DTC P0A7C in Computers and Control Systems Information. ------------------------------------------------- D9 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE DROP Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5622 - Start the engine. - With the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457C, positive post and 12-volt battery C1100A, positive post. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt? Yes GO to D10. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- D10 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE DROP - With the engine still running, and with the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457B, negative post and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side. - Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt? Yes GO to D11. No REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- D11 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE DC/DC CONVERTER WIRING HARNESS - Turn off the headlights and heater blower fan. - Ignition OFF. - Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457D. - Disconnect: TCM C1458E. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side, and TCM C1458E-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5623 - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side, and TCM C1458E-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side. - Are the resistances less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D12. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter wiring harness. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter Wiring Harness . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D12 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FOR AN OVER-CHARGING CONDITION - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457D. - Connect: TCM C1458E. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Repower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Ignition ON. - Measure the battery voltage and record. - Is the voltage less than 16 volts? Yes GO to D13. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D13 VERIFY CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Ignition OFF. - Measure the battery voltage and compare it to the value recorded in step D12. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5624 - Was the battery voltage at least 0.5 volts greater when the ignition was in the ON position? Yes If DTC P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 was retrieved, GO to D14. If DTC P0A08, P0A09 or P0A10 was retrieved, GO to D19. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D14 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: PCM C175T. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side, and PCM C175T-12, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D15. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D15 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side and ground. - Is any voltage present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5625 REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to D16. ------------------------------------------------- D16 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to D17. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D17 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION - Connect: PCM C175T. - Ignition ON. - Measure the battery voltage. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, disconnect the fused jumper wire between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground. - Does the battery voltage drop approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is connected (disabling the DC/DC converter) and increase approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is disconnected (enabling the DC/DC converter)? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5626 GO to D18. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D18 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER USING THE PCM DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE (DCE) PID - Ignition OFF. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - Measure the battery voltage. - While monitoring the measured battery voltage, command the PCM DCE active command on and off. - Does the battery voltage increase and decrease in accordance with the cycling of the active command? Yes CLEAR the DTCs. GO to D19. No GO to D26. ------------------------------------------------- D19 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if not previously disconnected). - Disconnect: PCM C175B. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side, and PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to D20. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D20 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5627 - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. - Is any voltage present? Yes REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No GO to D21. ------------------------------------------------- D21 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to D22. No REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D22 CHECK THE PCM FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT - Ignition OFF. - Measure the resistance between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-67, circuit CBB29 (WH/VT), component side, and between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-68, circuit GD122 (BK), component side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5628 - Are the resistances between 1,000 and 2,000 ohms? Yes GO to D23. No GO to D26. ------------------------------------------------- D23 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT IN THE PCM - Connect: PCM C175B. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side and ground. Is the voltage less than 10.5 volts? Yes GO to D26. No INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D24 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUITS FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONCERN - Ignition OFF. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if previously disconnected). - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM. - While monitoring the PCM DCE and PCM DC/DC converter status (DCE_F) PIDs, carefully wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the circuit and monitor the PIDs for a change in state. - Do the PIDs indicate a concern while wiggling the harness or connectors? Yes REPAIR the affected circuit(s). Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid) for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5629 No The concern cannot be duplicated at this time. VERIFY the 12-volt battery is sufficiently charged. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D25 CHECK THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect: TCM C1458D. - Disconnect: BCM C4227B. - Measure the resistance as shown in the table below: - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes INSTALL a new eCVT. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No INSTALL a new high-voltage cable assembly. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- D26 CHECK THE PCM FOR CORRECT OPERATION - Ignition OFF. - (if not previously turned to the OFF position) - Disconnect: PCM C175B. - Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Check the PCM and DC/DC converter connectors for: corrosion. - pushed-out pins. - spread terminals. - Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A. - Connect: PCM C175B. - Verify that each connector is correctly seated. - Carry out the PCM self-test and verify that the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. REPEAT the self-test. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5630 ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the console trim insert. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5633 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter. 4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt. - To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5634 6. Remove the DC/AC inverter. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5635 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point Power Point Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams Electronic Noise Suppressor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5639 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5644 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5645 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5646 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5649 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5650 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5651 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5656 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5657 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5658 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5659 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5660 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5669 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5670 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5671 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5672 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5673 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5674 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5675 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5676 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5677 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5678 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5679 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5680 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5681 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5682 Fuse Block: Connector Views Battery Junction Box (BJB) Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5683 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5684 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5696 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5697 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5698 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5699 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5700 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5701 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5702 C134 C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5703 C140 C210 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5704 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5705 C211 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5706 C212 C214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5707 C215 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5708 C237 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5709 C238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5710 C248 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5711 C263 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5712 C264 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5713 C311 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5714 C312 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5715 C313 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5716 C314 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5717 C316 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5718 C327 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5719 C339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5720 C340 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5721 C405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5722 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5723 C408 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5724 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5725 C410 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5726 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5727 C421 C422 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5728 C495 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5729 C914 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5730 C922 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5731 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5732 C913 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5733 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5734 C3007 C3133 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5735 C3134 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5736 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5754 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5755 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5756 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5775 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5776 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5777 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5782 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5783 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5784 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5785 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5786 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5789 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5790 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5791 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5792 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5793 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5794 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5795 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5796 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5797 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5800 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5801 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5802 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5807 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5808 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5809 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5810 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5811 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5814 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5815 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5816 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5817 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5818 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5819 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5820 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5821 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5822 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5825 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5826 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5827 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications NOTE: All alignment specifications are with the vehicle fuel tank full. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 5833 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 5834 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5837 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5838 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5839 Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5840 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Wheel Alignment Angles Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest caster. Toe Wheel Alignment Angles Toe Positive Toe (Toe In) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5841 Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Wheel Alignment Angles Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Wander Wheel Alignment Angles Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Wheel Alignment Angles Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Wheel Alignment Angles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page 5842 Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Wheel Alignment Angles Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. - A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. - Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown). Poor Groove Feel Wheel Alignment Angles Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." - Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. - In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (LH side) 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (RH side) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 5845 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position sensor calibration. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 5846 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 2). 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement 3). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 5847 5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement 2). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement 3). 3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height. - Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 5848 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nut(s). 6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the inner tie rod is rotated. Rotate the inner tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 5849 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Steering. Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. - Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Steering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5855 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5856 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5857 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 5864 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5870 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5871 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut. 5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5876 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut. 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle. - Discard the nuts and bolts. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut. - Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System. 8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. - Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5881 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5882 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5883 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5888 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5889 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5890 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 5896 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers. Typical PSP Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5902 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5903 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5904 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5905 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5906 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5907 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5912 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5913 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5914 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5915 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5916 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5917 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5926 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5932 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 5951 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 5957 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5963 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5969 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel Steering Gear: Customer Interest Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel TSB 10-20-12 10/25/10 SQUEAK OR RUB NOISE WHEN TURNING STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES BUILT 9/1/2009 TO 12/1/2009 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built 9/1/2009 to 12/1/2009 may exhibit a squeak or rubbing type noise from the steering column area when turning the steering wheel. The noise typically occurs when the vehicle is warm, but may diminish after the vehicle sits with engine off for an extended period of time. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Some amount of noise from the Electronic Power Assist Steering (EPAS) column is considered normal. 1. Turn steering wheel left and right lock-to-lock and listen for squeak or rubbing type noise. a. If noise is originating from the steering gear, proceed to Step 2. b. If noise is not originating from the steering gear, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-00. 2. Replace the steering gear. Refer to WSM, Section 211-02. 3. Perform steering wheel position sensor calibration. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102012A 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X2: 0.9 Hr. Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C) 102012B 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X4: 1.0 Hr. Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel > Page 5978 The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C) 102012C 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.7 Hr. Includes Time To Check And Adjust Front Toe (Can Be Claimed With Operation A Or B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3504 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel TSB 10-20-12 10/25/10 SQUEAK OR RUB NOISE WHEN TURNING STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES BUILT 9/1/2009 TO 12/1/2009 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built 9/1/2009 to 12/1/2009 may exhibit a squeak or rubbing type noise from the steering column area when turning the steering wheel. The noise typically occurs when the vehicle is warm, but may diminish after the vehicle sits with engine off for an extended period of time. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Some amount of noise from the Electronic Power Assist Steering (EPAS) column is considered normal. 1. Turn steering wheel left and right lock-to-lock and listen for squeak or rubbing type noise. a. If noise is originating from the steering gear, proceed to Step 2. b. If noise is not originating from the steering gear, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-00. 2. Replace the steering gear. Refer to WSM, Section 211-02. 3. Perform steering wheel position sensor calibration. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102012A 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X2: 0.9 Hr. Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C) 102012B 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X4: 1.0 Hr. Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel > Page 5984 The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C) 102012C 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.7 Hr. Includes Time To Check And Adjust Front Toe (Can Be Claimed With Operation A Or B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3504 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Steering Gear Steering Gear - Exploded View Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front wheels and tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. - Remove the ignition key. 3. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the coupling from the steering gear. To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5987 5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield. 6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. - To install, tighten the new nuts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 7. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid) 8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.5L 9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All vehicles 10. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower the rear of the front subframe slightly to provide clearance for removing the steering gear bolts. For additional information, refer to the front subframe exploded view in Frame. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts. To install, tighten the new bolts to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid), it is necessary to grasp the driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear. Rotate the steering gear 90 degrees clockwise and remove it from the LH side of the vehicle. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5988 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot Steering Gear Boot Removal and Installation 1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to Tie Rod End - Outer See: Tie Rod/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Outer. 2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 5997 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6003 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6009 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6015 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6016 Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Steering Column Shaft Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6017 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel. 3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt. - Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside. 4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. Position the connectors and harnesses aside. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt is accessible. 6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column shaft coupling-to-steering column bolt. - To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key. - Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column. 9. Remove the 3 steering column dash seal nuts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft. 11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt. - To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal. 13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft. - Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash seal. 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6026 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6032 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6041 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 6047 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop TSB 10-20-1 10/25/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010 FORD: 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date. ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL CHARACTERISTIC. Drive Chain Replacement: 1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Install the holding fixture 307-625. 3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture. 4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566. 5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091. 6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter from the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6053 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6054 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6055 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6056 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6057 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6058 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6059 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6060 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6061 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6067 7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts. (Figure 1) 8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2) 9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6068 10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4) 11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5) 12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6069 13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7) 14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8) 15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain. (Figure 9) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6070 16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10) 17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets. 18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11) 19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6071 20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13) 21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6072 22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15) 23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16) 24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6073 25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18) 26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19) 27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace. 28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case. (Figure 20) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6074 29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21) 30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635. 31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter. 32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091. 33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566. 34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture. 35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625. 36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01. 37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F (85-93 °C). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs. Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs. Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 6075 Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7G249 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch Steering Wheel: Locations Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 6078 Steering Wheel: Locations Steering Wheel/Speed Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 6079 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Removal and Installation 1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring. - Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside. 3. Remove the steering wheel bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. NOTICE: Do not allow the Steering Wheel Puller to damage the steering wheel switch wires and connector while removing the steering wheel. Using the Steering Wheel Puller, remove the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 6080 5. Tape the clockspring center rotor to the outer housing to keep it from rotating. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Inner Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Inner Tie Rod End - Inner Removal and Installation NOTICE: When servicing inner tie rods, a new bellows boot and clamps must be installed or a leak may occur causing steering gear damage. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. Turn the steering wheel fully in the direction of the inner tie-rod end that is being removed. 3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 5. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle and remove the tie rod. 6. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 7. Remove and discard the boot clamps and the steering gear bellows boot. 8. Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack. 9. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie-rod end. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 10. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack while tightening the inner tie rod. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Inner > Page 6085 Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Outer Tie Rod End - Outer Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle. 5. Remove the outer tie-rod end. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection Lower................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6090 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Suspension System Component Tests Ball Joint Inspection 1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Install a new wheel bearing as necessary. Refer to Front Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle. 2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame. Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position. 3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage. - If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary. Refer to Front Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle. 4. NOTICE: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or suspension components while checking for relative movement. Suspension damage may occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using hand force only. Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and lower arm at the lower ball joint. - If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint. - If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5. 5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of the ball joint. To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud. 6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower control arm, by hand. - If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed. Refer to Front Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle. - If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Arm Bushing: Testing and Inspection Suspension System Component Tests Lower Arm Rearward Bushing Inspection NOTE: Some lower arm rearward bushings may exhibit minor surface cracks or separations that will not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Surface cracks or separations that are 10 mm (0.393 in) or less in depth will function normally and do not require lower arm replacement. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting 2. Inspect the rubber portion of the lower arm rearward bushing for cracks or a separation between the rubber and the bushing outer sleeve. - If a crack or separation is found, insert a paper clip or other suitable measuring device into the crack or separation and measure the depth. - If the bushing has a crack or separation that is greater than 10 mm (0.393 in) in depth, install a new lower arm. Refer to Front Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut. 5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6098 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut. 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle. - Discard the nuts and bolts. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut. - Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System. 8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. - Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Bushing Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar bushing bracket bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the new bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6111 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6117 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6118 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Link Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove or install the stabilizer bar link nuts. Damage to the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots may occur. NOTICE: Do not hold the stabilizer bar link boot with any tool or damage to the boot may occur. NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway torque. NOTE: When installing the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar, make sure the stabilizer bar is perpendicular to the stabilizer link when tightening the link nut or the link nut may not seat properly. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove and discard the lower stabilizer bar link nut. - To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new parts. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6128 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6129 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6135 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6136 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6137 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6138 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6139 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6140 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6141 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6142 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6143 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6144 NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6145 All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6146 6. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). For additional information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter. 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6147 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6148 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. NOTE: When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6157 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6158 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6164 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6165 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6171 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6172 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6173 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6174 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6175 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6176 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6177 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6186 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6187 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6193 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6194 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6195 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6196 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6197 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6198 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6199 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6200 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6201 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly. All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6202 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6211 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6212 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6218 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6219 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6220 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6221 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6222 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6223 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6224 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6225 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Strut and Spring Assembly Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6230 Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod Constant Velocity (CV) joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Overhaul. Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. - Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Rear Suspension Spring Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6231 NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicle similar. Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. 3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and position the brake tube and bracket assembly aside. 4. Using a suitable jackstand, support the wheel knuckle. 5. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut, washer and bolt. 6. Remove the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm. 7. Loosen the lower arm inner bolt. 8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulators and coil spring for installation. Using the jackstand, carefully lower the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6232 9. Remove the coil spring. Installation 1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulators to the previously noted position. 2. Using a suitable jackstand, carefully raise the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the new shock absorber lower bolt, washer and nut. - Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4. Install the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm. 5. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder. - Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in). 6. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 7. Bleed the rear wheel cylinder. For addition information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for Component Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6233 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut. - To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6234 the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Strut and Spring Assembly Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6239 Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod Constant Velocity (CV) joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Overhaul. Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. - Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut. - Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt. - Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or Alignment. Rear Suspension Shock Absorber Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6240 retention of these parts. 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 3. Using a suitable jackstand, support the rear suspension. 4. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nut and bushing assembly. - To install, tighten the new nut and bushing assembly to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt. - To install, tighten the new nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 6. Remove the shock absorber. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6241 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut. - To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6242 the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6247 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6248 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6249 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD) Removal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6250 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. 2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. 4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press. - Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. - Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6251 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Jacking and Lifting WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6265 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6266 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6272 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 6273 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Removal NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6278 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. 2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6279 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6280 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD) Removal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6281 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. 2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. 4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press. - Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate. - Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6282 5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive (AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft). Front wheel hub nut Tighten to............................................................................................................. ......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tighten the wheel nuts in a star/cross pattern. Tighten to.................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................135 Nm (100 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. - Discard the wheel stud. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6292 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Studs Removal and Installation NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result. 1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. 2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. - Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6293 against the washers. - Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub flange. 4. Remove the wheel nut and washers. 5. Install the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6300 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6301 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6302 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6303 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Mode Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Mode Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6306 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6307 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6308 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6309 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator Climate Control System Component Tests Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 6312 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Blend Door Actuator Climate Control System Component Tests Blend Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 6313 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Air Inlet Door Actuator Climate Control System Component Tests Air Inlet Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Removal and Installation NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the instrument panel. 1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6316 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6317 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH Removal and Installation NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle. 1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw. 4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct screw. 5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of the Audio Control Module (ACM). Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6318 1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer. 2. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 8. NOTICE: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the plenum chamber when removing the screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to jam, or may cause noise concerns. NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the RH temperature blend door actuator screws. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6319 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH Removal and Installation NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator. For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH See: Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH. 1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6328 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6329 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6335 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6336 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Duct: Removal and Replacement Footwell Duct - Rear Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels. Vehicles with automatic transmission 4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly. 1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever. 2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6339 5. NOTE: Position the carpet to gain access to the floor ducts. Separate the wiring harness from the LH floor duct and position aside. 6. Remove the LH floor duct. 7. Remove the RH floor duct pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the RH floor duct. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6340 Air Duct: Overhaul Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6341 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. 3. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. 4. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter. 6. Remove the 4 Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM. - Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws. 8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws. 9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts. 10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6342 11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker. 12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw. 13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws. 14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors. 15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws. 16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws. 17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws. 18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the LH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly. 19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the RH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly. 20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6351 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6352 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6358 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6359 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side Register - Passenger Side Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the passenger side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 6362 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center Register - Center Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish panel assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 6363 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side Register - Driver Side Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the driver side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6367 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6368 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6369 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6373 - Fill the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6379 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6380 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6381 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6382 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6383 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6384 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6385 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6386 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6387 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6388 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6389 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6390 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6394 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6395 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6396 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6397 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6398 Blower Motor: Connector Views Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6399 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower motor. Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6403 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6404 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6408 Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6409 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6410 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Blower Motor Resistor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6411 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Resistor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor resistor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6415 Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6416 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6417 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6424 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6425 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6428 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Adjustments Compressor Clutch: Adjustments Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment 1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C clutch pulley. 2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft until the clearance is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 6433 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Clutch and Clutch Field Coil - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal 1. Remove the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. 1. Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 6434 3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s). 4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring. 5. NOTICE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch pulley or A/C compressor may result. Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 1. Install the A/C Compressor Shaft Protector. 2. Install a suitable 3 jaw puller on the A/C compressor shaft protector and A/C compressor pulley. 3. Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. Installation NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with a clutch and pulley. If not, the A/C clutch components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found. 1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for damage. - Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to excessive heat. - Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor pulley that is more than fingernail depth. - Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing. 2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 3. Install the A/C clutch field coil. 4. Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 5. NOTICE: The Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor must be positioned on the press so that only the flat part of the A/C compressor housing is contacting the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press shaft. If the A/C compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C compressor pulley will be damaged. Install the A/C compressor pulley. 1. Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press. 2. Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor. 3. Install the A/C Clutch Installer on the A/C compressor pulley. 4. Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 6435 6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub. 9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt. 1. Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench. 2. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (177 lb-in). 10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers. 11. Install the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams Compressor Clutch Coil: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6439 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6443 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6444 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning A/C Condenser The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. On non-hybrid vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6448 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser Core - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6449 5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets. 6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Vehicles with automatic transmission 7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line (passenger side front of transmission). The transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of transmission). Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser. All vehicles 8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the condenser core. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new HVAC module on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be carried out to configure the new module to the vehicle. Refer to Information Bus. 1. Remove the middle center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws. 3. Remove the HVAC module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6457 Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6460 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6461 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6462 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Refrigerant Line Fittings NOTICE: Use only a plastic or nonmetallic tool for removing O-ring seals and gasket seals from the refrigerant line fittings. Use of a metallic tool will create scratches on the sealing surface of the fitting that can result in refrigerant system leaks. Whenever a refrigerant line fitting is disconnected, the fitting must be cleaned of any foreign material and new O-ring seals and/or gasket seals must be installed. Use only the O-ring seals and gasket seals specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. If a refrigerant system line fitting must remain disconnected for an extended period of time, it should be capped to avoid contamination of the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6469 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6478 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6479 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6485 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6486 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6487 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Core The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6488 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the fittings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator core/TXV tube connections. 5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. - If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. - If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. - If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser core. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator core or condenser core. Test the system for normal operation. If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6492 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) Air Conditioning Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) > Page 6497 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer Air Conditioning A/C Pressure Transducer (Non-Hybrid Only) The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. The A/C pressure transducer is located on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6498 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Thermostatic Expansion Valve Removal and Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6499 - If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled. - Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals. - Add the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid) to the refrigerant system. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6504 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6505 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 6506 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test Climate Control System Component Tests Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6507 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Relief Valve - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service part. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6515 6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6516 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Condenser to Receiver Drier Line Removal and Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6517 4. Remove the evaporator-to-compressor suction line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 8. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Add the correct amount of clean electric A/C compressor oil to the refrigerant system. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6518 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6519 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6520 - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 8. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing Removal and Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. 1. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6525 - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core. 6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing in the following sequence. 1. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs. 2. Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle while pulling the housing toward the RH door opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct. 3. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed. 9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals. - Add the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid) to the refrigerant system. 10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block Heater. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6526 Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6527 Disassembly and Assembly Plenum chamber 1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber. 3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6528 4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. Remove the plenum chamber. Air inlet duct 7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct. 8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. Complete disassembly 10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness. 11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor. 13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal. 14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 15. Remove the heater core. 16. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) dash panel seal. 17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal. 18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped). 19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped). 20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor. 22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Receiver/Drier NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed. The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from the refrigerant. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6532 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Receiver Drier - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation NOTE: The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not necessary to install a new receiver/drier. NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 3. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector. 5. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6533 - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. 6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip. 7. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the receiver/drier. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity................................. ..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6538 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity................................. ..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification........................................... ......................................................................................................................................................WS H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................... ...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6539 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Identification Testing Refrigerant Identification 1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system. Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following: - If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital display. - If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display. - If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light, "Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will also be displayed on the digital display. 3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt the user if an air purge is desired. 4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the refrigerant is indeed contaminated. Contaminated Refrigerant Handling NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment. NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system flushing procedure. 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Flush the A/C system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging Refrigerant System Recovery NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6542 NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Identification Testing See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once repairs are complete. 4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF the power supply. 5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment. 6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6543 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves. 2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the Vacuum Pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves. 4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set. NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6544 refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present. 1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6545 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any foreign material/debris. These components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The F8VZ-19E773-AB filter is intended for use on one vehicle only. All vehicles 1. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seal. 2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit (219-00074) are designed for low-pressure flushing and are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant will occur. NOTE: Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating. Using the correct adapters and service hoses, install the pancake filter between the condenser and the condenser outlet fitting. 3. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding. 4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6546 Non-hybrid vehicles 5. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Start the engine and allow it to idle briefly. Select A/C operation and set the blower speed to HI. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly. 6. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at 800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at 1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating. 7. Stop the engine. Hybrid vehicles 8. Start the vehicle and select A/C operation. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly. 9. Run the A/C system for one hour. All vehicles 10. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 11. Remove the pancake filter, hoses and adapters from the vehicle. 12. Install a new gasket seal and connect the condenser outlet fitting. 13. Install a new receiver/drier. 14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity..................................... ..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid 325 ml (11 fl oz) Item....................................................................................................................................................... ...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......- Fill Capacity................................................................................................................................. .............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) Refer to the Refrigerant Oil Adding / Procedures. See: Service and Repair Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6551 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification............................................... ..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................ ..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity..................................... ..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid 325 ml (11 fl oz) Item....................................................................................................................................................... ...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......- Fill Capacity................................................................................................................................. .............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6552 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Adding Refrigerant Oil Adding NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTICE: During normal Air Conditioning (A/C) operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation. a If an excessive amount of refrigerant oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage, the total system refrigerant oil capacity must be Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6553 added. b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the refrigerant oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired. Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement - Non-Hybrid NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil. 1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations (clockwise) while collecting the PAG oil in a clean measuring cup. - Add the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery. Adding Refrigerant Oil After Electric A/C Compressor Replacement - Hybrid NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil. For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate and damage the hybrid A/C system. NOTE: Service electric A/C compressors are shipped with 60 ml (2 fl oz) of electric A/C compressor oil already installed. 1. Drain the oil from the old electric compressor into a clean measuring cup. - If the amount of oil drained is less than or equal to 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the amount of oil collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated. - If the amount of oil drained is greater than 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the difference between the amount collected and 60 ml (2 fl oz), plus the amount collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery, to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated. Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. NOTICE: Do not add liquid based R-134a Leak Detection Dye to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped with an electric A/C compressor. Liquid based dyes are mixed with PAG oil, and will contaminate and damage the hybrid refrigerant system. Dye can only be added to hybrid vehicles by installing a new receiver/drier which includes a fluorescent dye "wafer" which will dissolve after approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. NOTE: The dye/lubricant injector is included as part of the 219-00069 R-134a Loop/Add On Injector Kit-Set. NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct adapters to match the amount of refrigerant compressor oil to be injected. 3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6554 4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of new refrigerant compressor oil. 5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set. 6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6558 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6559 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6564 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6565 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6569 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6570 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6575 Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6578 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6579 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6580 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6585 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6586 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6587 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests Ambient Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6591 Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6592 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6593 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6597 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6598 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control System Component Tests In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar. Removal and Installation 1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6601 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6605 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6609 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6613 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6614 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6618 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Service Gauge Port Valves The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line. The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line. NOTE: Different valve cores are used for different engine applications. Use only the valve core listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent for the vehicle and fitting being serviced. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component. - Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports. - A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core can be installed if the seal leaks excessively. - The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6625 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision 1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision > Page 6631 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices have deployed and/or the Restraints Control Module (RCM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components, carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset procedure as instructed in the diagnostic/repair information. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS system rails. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared. - For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231/B1193:00 cannot be cleared. - For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: - Steering column (deployable column if equipped) - Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points - Instrument panel braces and brackets - Instrument panel and mounting points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision > Page 6632 - Seats and seat mounting points - Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems - SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6638 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6639 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6640 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6641 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6642 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6643 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6648 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6649 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6650 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6651 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6652 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6653 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Locations Driver Air Bag Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6658 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6659 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6660 Air Bag: Locations Passenger Air Bag Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6663 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6664 Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6665 Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Module, Left > Page 6666 Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Air Bag: Service and Repair Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim cover from the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may damage the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the soft pack becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks during the removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module. 2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation. 3. Carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover from the bottom of the air bag module canister, separating the windows from the canister hooks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6669 4. NOTE: Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling. Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the canister hooks. Installation 1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping package. 2. WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft pack before assembly. If any foreign objects are found, remove them before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If the canister or soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the passenger air bag cover to the canister. 3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure. 4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air bag cover windows. 5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks. 6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a hook installed and the sides are not tucked or folded against the air bag canister. 7. Install the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module. 8. NOTE: The video procedure utilizes a Fusion/Milan passenger air bag module assembly. It also applies to vehicles with similar passenger air bag module designs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6670 Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module Driver Air Bag Module Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 3. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6671 4. Disconnect the horn and 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. Installation 1. Connect the driver air bag module and horn electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks. - When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure all 3 hooks are fully seated. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when pressing the horn. 3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6672 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module Passenger Air Bag Module Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTICE: Do not install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or discolored passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be serviced separately from the passenger air bag module assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover Passenger See: Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the passenger air bag cover. Failure to follow these Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6673 instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger air bag cover clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module passenger air bag cover clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. 4. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 5. NOTICE: During installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6674 Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module Safety Canopy Module NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live Safety Canopy(R), or side air curtain module, with the module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6675 NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar. 4. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt. - If the vehicle is equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, note the roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose position and routing for installation purposes. 5. Remove the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. 6. Disconnect the Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector and detach the connector from the D-pillar. 7. Detach the Safety Canopy(R) module wiring clip from the roof panel brace. 8. Remove the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the inflator (between the C- and D-pillars). 9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, disconnect the drain hose. 10. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose aside. 11. Remove the remaining 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1 between the B- and C-pillars). 12. Lift to unhook the Safety Canopy(R) module from the C-pillar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6676 13. Move the Safety Canopy(R) module forward and release the rear hook. Installation WARNING: Before installing a Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a Safety Canopy(R) module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install new Safety Canopy(R) module J-nuts. 2. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of correct roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window solvent hose routing. Position the Safety Canopy(R) module and insert the rear hook into the sheet metal cavity. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6677 3. Hook the Safety Canopy(R) module into the C-pillar. 4. Install the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar. 6. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch the front roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose. Install the A-pillar tether bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. Install the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and C-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip. 9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, connect the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 10. Connect the Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6678 11. Install the Safety Canopy(R) module wiring clip to the roof panel brace. 12. Install the remaining 2 rear Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the ignitor (between the Cand D-pillars). - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 13. Install the headliner. 14. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6679 Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module Side Air Bag Module NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. For additional information, refer to front seat backrest disassembly and assembly procedure in Seats. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6680 Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 1. Remove the rear screw. - For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws. 2. Push the side shield forward to release. 3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring harness could become damaged when the seat is moved. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Seats with manual lumbar adjust 4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob. All seats 6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip. 7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip. The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module. 9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6681 10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module. 12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame. 13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag module. Installation WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: - Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage and may cause system failure. All seats Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6682 1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module. 4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and seat backrest frame. 6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips. 7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion. 8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6683 Seats with manual lumbar adjust 9. Install the manual lumbar control knob. All seats 10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical connector and attach it to the seat track. 11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw. 12. Install the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6687 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6688 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6689 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6690 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6691 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs may set. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6692 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6693 connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6694 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel center finish panel. 1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute. 2. Lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector. - Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6701 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6705 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Clockspring Removal NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle. 4. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Remove the steering wheel. 5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an assembly. Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly. 6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever and remove the lower steering column shroud. 7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 screws and clockspring. Installation 1. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the steering wheel is installed. If the Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6706 anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Install the clockspring and 2 screws. 2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 3. Install the lower steering column shroud and 3 screws. 4. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud. 5. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt, repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to Step 7. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance. Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point. 6. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to center the clockspring. Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the window. - the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock position. - the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position. 7. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring, make sure the road wheels are in the 12 o'clock position to install the steering wheel. Install the steering wheel. 8. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6707 9. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6712 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6713 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6714 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6715 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6716 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6717 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6718 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6719 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6720 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6723 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6724 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6725 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6726 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6727 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6728 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6731 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6732 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6736 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6740 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6743 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6744 from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6745 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6746 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6747 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6748 Removal NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6749 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6750 the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6751 Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6752 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6756 Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6757 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. For additional information, refer to front seat backrest disassembly and assembly procedure in Seats. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6761 1. Remove the rear screw. - For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws. 2. Push the side shield forward to release. 3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring harness could become damaged when the seat is moved. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Seats with manual lumbar adjust 4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob. All seats 6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip. 7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip. The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module. 9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6762 10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module. 12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame. 13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag module. Installation WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: - Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage and may cause system failure. All seats Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6763 1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module. 4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and seat backrest frame. 6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips. 7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion. 8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6764 Seats with manual lumbar adjust 9. Install the manual lumbar control knob. All seats 10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical connector and attach it to the seat track. 11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw. 12. Install the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6769 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6770 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6771 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6772 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6773 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs may set. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option. NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option that is disabled. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6774 2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts. 4. Remove the RCM access cover. - Remove the scrivet. - Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover. 5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6775 connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in. 6. Install the RCM access cover. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the scrivet. 7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6776 8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures. 9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 10. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6780 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6786 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6787 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6788 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6789 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6790 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6791 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6796 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6797 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6798 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6799 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6800 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6801 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end. 2. Remove the bolt and child safety seat tether anchor. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death to the child in a sudden stop or crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt when deployed. When the pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the vehicle is involved in a crash that results in pretensioner deployment, a new safety belt buckle and pretensioner must be installed. For safety belt buckle and pretensioner diagnosis and disposal information, refer to Restraint Systems. Second row safety belt buckles The second row safety belt buckles can be serviced separately. After any crash, new safety belt systems components (including retractors and buckles) must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6809 Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification Functional Test - Safety Belt Buckle and Tongue The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female portion). 1. Verify the following during the latching sequence: - Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort. - A click is heard when the safety belt buckle latches the tongue. 2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the safety belt webbing. 3. Unlatch the safety belt by fully depressing the safety belt buckle release button and allowing the safety belt to release and retract. 4. Verify the following during the unlatching process: - Push-button depression does not require excessive effort. - The tongue can be removed easily from the buckle. 5. Repeat the above steps 3 times. 6. If the functional test reveals a concern(s), install a new safety belt buckle or safety belt retractor as required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Power Seat (Driver Only) Manual Seat NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6812 Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Remove the screws and inboard seat cushion side shield. 3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for correct installation. Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 5. For the driver seat, remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track and detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 7. Remove the bolt and safety belt buckle and pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6813 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear Safety Belt Buckle - Rear Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat cushion forward. Remove the bolt and rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 2. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6818 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6821 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6825 2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. 3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool. 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation, however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R) once again reverts to the disabled state. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool. 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation, however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R) once again reverts to the disabled state. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. Safety Belt Retractors - Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only) - Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) - Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat) - BTS (front passenger only) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor The safety belt retractor must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions. 1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions. 2. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. 3. Install a new safety belt retractor if any concern is found or the complaint has been verified. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6837 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode 1. Position the seat backrest fully upright (if adjustable). 2. Position the safety belt shoulder height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position. 3. Fasten the safety belt. 4. Pull out the safety belt webbing until the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature is activated. 5. Allow the safety belt webbing to retract until it stops. 6. Pull on the safety belt webbing to check that the safety belt retractor has remained in the ALR mode. If the safety belt retractor is not locked, install a new safety belt retractor. 7. Unfasten the safety belt and allow the safety belt webbing to retract to its stowed position. 8. Pull out and retract the safety belt webbing to verify the safety belt retractor has converted automatically out of ALR mode. If the safety belt retractor remains locked in the ALR mode, install a new safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6838 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection Safety Belt System Component Test WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection WARNING: The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the safety belt retractor does not lock. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive slack in the safety belt webbing across the torso during testing. NOTE: Do not jerk on the safety belt webbing when carrying out this test. 1. Test the safety belts in the following sequence: 1. Fasten the safety belts and proceed to a safe area. 2. Attain a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph). 3. WARNING: Apply maximum brake force only on dry concrete or equivalent hard surface, NEVER on wet pavement or gravel. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Grasp the shoulder harness, lean forward and apply the brakes, making a maximum braking application without a skid. 4. The safety belts should lock up with minimum webbing extension. 5. If there is a lockup of all safety belt retractors being tested, the safety belt retractors are functioning correctly. If any safety belt retractor fails to lock up, install a new safety belt retractor(s). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor Safety Belt Retractor NOTE: Passenger side shown, driver similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6841 After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. 2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install a new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 3. Remove the bolt and D-ring. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 5. For passenger retractor, disconnect the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) electrical connector. 6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Remove the bolt and safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. Disconnect the pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering 12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6842 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6843 - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Remove the head restraints. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release lever. 1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. - To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2. Remove the seat latch release lever. 6. Remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield. 7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. 8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 9. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Pull up and remove the 4 head restraint guides. - Note the alignment tab position for correct installation. 10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6844 Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover. 11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. 12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor. 13. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 14. Remove the nut and safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6845 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear Safety Belt Retractor - Rear NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the cover and D-ring bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6846 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6854 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6855 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6856 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6857 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6862 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6867 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6868 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6869 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6870 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6871 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6872 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6873 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6874 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6875 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6878 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6879 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6880 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6881 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6882 Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2 Front Impact Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6883 Front Impact Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor Front Impact Severity Sensor Removal and Installation WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6886 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6887 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Removal WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor. - Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6892 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6895 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation Safety Belt System WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent. Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6902 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6905 Removal NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6906 from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6907 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest. 10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6908 12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 16. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6909 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6910 Removal NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. 6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6911 7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan. 8. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6912 the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. - To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6913 Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors. 4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. 8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats. Do not prove out the SRS within the seat installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to carry out the system reset procedure. 9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. 12. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6914 13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Position Sensor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6918 Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6919 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6925 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6926 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM Antenna Cable - AM/FM NOTE: View shown from behind instrument panel for clarity. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). 2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna. 3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers. Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 6933 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio Removal Upper cable 1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. - Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 6934 4. Remove the RH instrument panel side finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. - Disconnect the upper-to-lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector. Lower cable 5. Remove the RH Instrument panel side finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. - Disconnect the upper-to-lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 6. Remove the glove compartment. For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel - Exploded View in Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 7. Remove the ACM. For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). Disconnect the lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector from the ACM. All cables 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening cover. For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel - Exploded View in Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver electrical connector. 4. Using a suitable tool (such as a dentist pick), release the tabs and remove the PATS transceiver. 5. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) again. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams Alarm System Transponder: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6942 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6947 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6948 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming Programming a Personal Entry Code NOTE: The system allows 3 personal codes to be programmed. NOTE: Multiple personal codes can be programmed in one step. When programming multiple codes in one step, each code must be programmed by entering each button within 5 seconds of each other. If 5 seconds elapse between any button press, programming mode is exited. NOTE: If only a single personal code is desired or unable to program multiple codes in one step, each personal code can be programmed individually by repeating Steps 1-5 for each code desired. 1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad to activate the programming mode. 3. Enter the new personal 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within 5 seconds of each other. 4. After entering the new personal code, press a 6th button to program each new code. - Pressing 1/2 stores the first personal code. - Pressing 3/4 stores the second personal code. - Pressing 5/6, 7/8 or 9/0 stores the third personal code. 5. The door locks lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing a Personal Entry Code 1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5-digit code works. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6949 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair Keyless Entry Keypad Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems or Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time. NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed 5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 6954 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 6955 doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button twice. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 6956 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming Stepped Unlock Programming 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223 SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality TSB 10-25-12 12/23/10 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the jumper harness. ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Service Procedure Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6966 The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900 to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise. a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6967 ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Escape / Mariner 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6968 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Navigator / Expedition 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17C712 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6969 ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-150 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6970 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-Super Duty 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Flex Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6971 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Focus 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim. 2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6972 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Fusion / Milan / MKZ 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Taurus / Sable / Taurus X Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6973 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6974 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. Final Test / Service Steps 1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the jumper inline connector before connecting the microphone. ^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive. ^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference. ^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV. 2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make sure that the connector tabs have locked together after connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone. 3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223 SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality TSB 10-25-12 12/23/10 SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the jumper harness. ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time. Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17700 42 Disclaimer Service Procedure Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6980 The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner. NOTE THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS. Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button. 1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com. When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed. Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to assist customer. The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce system effectiveness. When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently. NOTE THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION. 2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900 to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise. a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods. b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or functionality. c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is minimized from view. When installing the microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize visible wire. Edge / MKX 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 1) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6981 ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Escape / Mariner 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6982 5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Navigator / Expedition 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figures 4 and 5) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console. ^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17C712 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 6) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6983 ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-150 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone. (Figure 7) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp. 2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp. 4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or front lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14358 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6984 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. F-Super Duty 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Flex Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6985 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Focus 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim. 2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6986 3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Fusion / Milan / MKZ 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps. Taurus / Sable / Taurus X Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6987 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12) ^ Firmly press the microphone into place. ^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the female side of the connector (17K745 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. MKS 1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13) a. Firmly press the microphone into place. b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6988 2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information. 3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner above the rear view mirror. 4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly behind microphone as shown. 5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector views. 6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used. 7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear view mirror and in the roof. 8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps. Final Test / Service Steps 1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the jumper inline connector before connecting the microphone. ^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive. ^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference. ^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV. 2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make sure that the connector tabs have locked together after connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone. 3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7004 Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7007 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7008 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7010 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7011 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7012 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7013 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7017 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7018 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen. 3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Audio Systems With Navigation 1. Turn the ACM on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7019 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7020 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) Without Navigation With Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7021 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 6. Remove the ACM. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7022 Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. 2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7037 Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7038 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7039 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7040 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7045 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7046 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7047 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7048 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7049 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7050 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7051 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7052 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7053 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7056 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7057 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7058 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7059 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7060 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7061 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7062 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7063 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7064 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7066 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7067 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7068 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7069 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7070 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7071 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Sensor NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal 1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts. 2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the active park assist sensor(s). - Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System Check See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist. If the active park assist sensor does not respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7075 Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7076 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Switch Removal 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7080 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Parking Aid Sensor NOTE: Bumper shown removed for clarity. Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Using a suitable tool, (such as a flat-blade screwdriver), gently pry the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Using the scan tool, verify that the parking aid sensor PIDs read no object present and that the parking aid sensor attenuation PIDs read between 0.8-1.6 ms. - Carry out the azimuth and elevation system check to verify the sensor(s) are operating correctly. For additional information, refer to Azimuth System Check See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Azimuth System Check and Elevation System Check See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Elevation System Check. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Vision Camera: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7084 Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair Video Camera Removal and Installation 1. Remove the license plate housing. For additional information, refer to Auxiliary Step / Running Board. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the video camera screw. 4. Remove the video camera bracket and camera from the license plate lamp housing. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7088 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7089 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 7092 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Message Center Switch Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7097 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Audio Input Jack Audio Input Jack Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips. Remove the instrument panel lower panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack > Page 7100 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port Floor Console Trim Panels Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable Removal and Installation NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable. 1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up. 2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door. Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack > Page 7101 - Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary. 3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the USB cable and port. - Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM). - Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) is being installed. Upload the FDIM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back. 3. Remove the 4 FDIM screws. 4. Remove the FDIM. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the FDIM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 7106 Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Removal and Installation NOTE: If the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be replaced. For additional information on installing a new middle instrument panel center finish panel, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Specifications Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Specifications Switch Settings Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7110 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Universal Transmitter The universal transmitter uses the Lear Car2U(R) System. It is identified by the lack of a symbol, but with 3 red indicator lights. Each of the 3 buttons has a red indicator light located behind the 3 buttons. The universal transmitter is an integral part of the LH sun visor and provides a convenient way to substitute up to 3 hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. The universal transmitter can transmit the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters. The universal transmitter: - operates garage doors, gates and home/office lighting and security systems. - transmits the radio frequency of up to 3 hand-held transmitters from any of the systems mentioned above. - is powered by the vehicle battery and charging system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Universal Transmitter Inspection and Verification Universal Transmitter Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the correct programing procedure was used. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming See: Programming and Relearning. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com. 2. Verify the customer concern. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 5. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7113 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Universal Transmitter Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7114 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Pinpoint Tests Universal Transmitter Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The Universal Transmitter is Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 89 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Interior Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The universal transmitter receives voltage through the battery saver relay power output circuit. The power and ground circuits are shared with the LH vanity mirror lamp. When a programmed button is pressed on the universal transmitter, a wireless signal is sent to the receiver unit. If the device does not operate the garage door, it may be due to an incorrect programming procedure being carried out. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming See: Programming and Relearning to verify the universal transmitter was correctly programmed. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com . This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Interior lighting concerns - Universal transmitter - Receiver unit PINPOINT TEST A: THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE LH SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR OPERATION - Check the illumination of the LH sun visor vanity mirror lamps. - Do the vanity mirror lamps illuminate? Yes GO to A2. No REFER to Lighting and Horns to continue diagnosis of the vanity mirror lamps. ------------------------------------------------- A2 PROGRAM A HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER INTO THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - Program the universal transmitter. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming See: Programming and Relearning. - Does the universal transmitter program successfully? Yes The universal transmitter is OK. VERIFY the receiver unit operates correctly by attempting to operate the device. No INSTALL a new LH sun visor assembly. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7115 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Programming and Relearning Universal Transmitter Programming Universal Transmitter Programming (Rolling Code) WARNING: To avoid the risk of serious injury from the door closing, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door opener or security device that is being programmed. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. NOTE: Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Lear Car2U(R) System. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have an assistant when programming the universal transmitter. Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure before beginning so the procedure can be carried out in a timely manner. If the time-sensitive actions are not carried out in a timely manner, the device times out and the procedure needs to be repeated. NOTE: Make sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Lear Car2U(R) System programming. It is only needed for fixed code device programming. NOTE: To determine if you have a fixed code or a rolling code device, open the garage door opener transmitter and if there is a panel of coded dip switches present, the device is a fixed code device. For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter Programming (Fixed Code). If there are no coded dip switches present, the device is a rolling code device and this procedure should be followed. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com . 1. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 2. Firmly press the 2 outside Lear Car2U(R) System buttons (at the same time) for 1-2 seconds, then release the buttons. 3. NOTE: Step 4 must be initiated within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the "learn" or "smart" button. At the garage door opener receiver (the motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit; or it may be under the light bulb cover of the motor-head unit. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. For technical assistance, refer to the Owner's Literature. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com. 4. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the desired universal transmitter button for 5-20 seconds to program. During this time, the selected button red indicator light blinks slowly. Once the garage door begins to move, within one second, release the button. With the button released, the red indicator light begins to blink rapidly until programming is complete. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. 5. After successful programming, the Lear Car2U(R) System operates the garage door opener using the button that was programmed. The red indicator light behind the programmed button illuminates to confirm the Lear Car2U(R) System is responding (and is programmed) to the button command. Erasing the Lear Car2U(R) System Buttons (Rolling Code) 1. To erase the rolling code programming from the Lear Car2U(R) System, turn the ignition key to the ON position, firmly press and hold the 2 outside Lear Car2U(R) System buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink rapidly. 2. When the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink, release the buttons. The codes for all of the 3 buttons are erased. Universal Transmitter Programming (Fixed Code) WARNING: To avoid the risk of serious injury from the door closing, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door opener or security device that is being programmed. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. NOTE: Do not use the Lear Car2U(R) System with any garage door opener that does not have a "stop and reverse" feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. NOTE: Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Lear Car2U(R) System. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have an assistant when programming the universal transmitter. NOTE: Make sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Lear Car2U(R) System programming. It is only needed for fixed code device programming. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7116 NOTE: To determine if you have a fixed code or a rolling code device, open the garage door opener transmitter and if there is a panel of coded dip switches present, the device is a fixed code device. If there are no coded dip switches present, the device is a rolling code device. If there are no coded dip switches present, refer to Universal Transmitter Programming (Rolling Code). NOTE: To program a fixed code device, paper and a pen (or pencil) is necessary. Make a copy of the Switch Settings chart in Specifications to use as a note pad. 1. Open the battery cover of the universal transmitter to reveal the coded dip switches and their associated settings. 2. NOTE: When a coded dip switch is in the Up, +, or On position, circle "Left" on the chart under the correct switch position number. When a switch is in the Middle, 0 or Neutral position, circle "Middle" on the chart. When a switch is in the Down, -, or Off position, circle "Right" on the chart. Record the dip switch settings on the copy of the switch settings chart by circling the setting under the correct switch position number. Do this from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches (the number of switches varies between transmitter manufacturers. For additional information, refer to the chart below or to the Switch Settings chart in Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7117 3. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 4. To input the dip switch settings into the Lear Car2U(R) System, press (at the same time) all 3 Lear Car2U(R) System buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into the programming mode. The 3 red indicator lights blink slowly. Within 2.5 minutes, enter the corresponding dip switch settings from left to right (starting with number 1) into the Lear Car2U(R) System by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled. For example, if the dip switch settings were switch 1 (Right), switch 2 (Right), switch 3 (Left), switch 4 (Middle) etc., press and release the right Lear Car2U(R) System button, then the right button, then the left button, then the middle button, etc. 5. After inputting the dip switch settings, press and release (at the same time) all 3 Lear Car2U(R) System buttons. The 3 red indicator lights are turned on continuously. 6. Press and hold the Lear Car2U(R) System button chosen to control the garage door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7118 7. Once the garage door starts to move, within one second, release the button. During this time, the selected button indicator light blinks slowly. Do not release the button until the garage door moves, which may take anywhere from 5-55 seconds, depending on the make/model of the garage door opener. 8. The 3 red indicator lights begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete. If the garage door opener does not operate, repeat Steps 1-6. - For technical assistance, refer to the Owner's Literature. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com. 9. After successful programming, the Lear Car2U(R) System operates the garage door opener using the button that was programmed. The red indicator light behind the programmed button turns on to confirm the Lear Car2U(R) System is responding (and is programmed) to the button command. Erasing the Lear Car2U(R) System Buttons (Fixed Code) 1. To erase the fixed code programming from the Lear Car2U(R) System, turn the ignition key to the ON position, firmly press and hold the 2 outside Lear Car2U(R) System buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink rapidly. 2. When the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink, release the buttons. The codes for all of the 3 buttons are erased. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7151 Global Positioning System Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7152 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7153 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7154 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM). - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7164 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7170 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement TSB 10-21-9 11/08/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING ENGAGEMENT FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or drive before coming to a complete stop. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F (85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set TSB 10-12-12 07/05/10 6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731, P0732 FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away (Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA, P0731, P0732. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECALEM 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier Amplifier: Diagrams Subwoofer Amplifier Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7194 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7195 Amplifier: Diagrams Audio Amplifier Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7196 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7197 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7198 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier Amplifier: Service and Repair Subwoofer Amplifier Subwoofer Amplifier Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7201 Amplifier: Service and Repair Audio Amplifier Audio Amplifier Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the audio amplifier electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access. Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the audio amplifier. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations Radio/Stereo: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7205 Radio/Stereo: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7206 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair Remote Control: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Controls Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure. Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel. 2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel controls. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7215 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7216 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7217 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7218 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7219 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7220 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Door Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Door Speaker - Door NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Door > Page 7223 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Subwoofer Speaker - Subwoofer Removal and Installation NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete assembly. 1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7229 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7230 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7246 Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7249 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7250 Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7252 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7253 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7254 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7255 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7256 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Communications Control Module: Procedures Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool. 4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port. 5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet. 7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level. - The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software levels. 8. The scan tool displays the following information: - Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM - Installed date: date the APIM was installed - Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle - HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number - Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled - S/N: APIM serial number - Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7259 - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation - VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time - CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time - Description: a description of the content of the software revision - Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected - Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision - VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection - CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection - Description: a description of the content of the software revision 9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software level, if desired. 10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB port, or exit the OASIS screen. Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode Audio Systems Without Navigation 1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step 3 by turning the ACM off. Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7260 5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off. Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval - Vehicles Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen. 3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 4. Turn the audio system off. Audio Systems With Navigation 1. Turn the ACM on. 2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode. 3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins. - The display indicates each speaker as it is tested. 4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to complete on its own. Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7261 5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu: 6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7262 Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement Audio Control Module (ACM) Audio Control Module (ACM) Without Navigation With Navigation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7263 Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Remove the 4 ACM screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation). - To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation). Navigation 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors. All except navigation 5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM. Remove the 2 ACM brackets. All vehicles 6. Remove the ACM. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) software and hardware level when a new APIM is being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being replaced. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7264 Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check. 2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM. - Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions TSB 10-13-4 07/19/10 SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010 FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic, directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions and/or unable to pin point vehicle location. ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr. Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10E893 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7278 Global Positioning System Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7279 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7280 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7281 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM). - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7290 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns TSB 10-6-3 04/12/10 SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010 FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT. a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010. b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes: (1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD. (2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD. (3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS. 2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT. NOTE IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr. System DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 42 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7296 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition TSB 09-26-4 01/04/10 ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module (PAM) prior to performing this procedure. a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2. b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B. 2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7310 Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7311 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7312 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7313 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Parking Aid Module (PAM) Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being installed. Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disengage the clips. - Remove the parking aid speaker. 4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows: - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the PAM. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7319 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7320 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7321 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7322 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7323 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7324 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7325 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7326 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7327 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7330 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7331 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7332 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7333 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7334 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7335 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left Active Park Assist Sensor, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7336 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7337 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7338 Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7340 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7341 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7342 Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7343 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7344 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7345 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Sensor NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal 1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts. 2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the active park assist sensor(s). - Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System Check See: Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist. If the active park assist sensor does not respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See: Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7349 Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7350 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair Active Park Assist Switch Removal 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines TSB 09-20-13 10/19/09 6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground. Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines. 1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93 °C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1) 2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h). 3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time. 4. Start and run the engine for: a. 5 minutes before towing each day b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less. c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7356 These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating. If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure 1) per WSM Section 307-01. NOTE THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION. If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7000 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7373 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7374 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7375 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7376 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7377 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7378 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7379 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7380 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7381 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification Trailer Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7384 Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Trailer Lamps Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7385 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through a dedicated ground circuit. This circuit is the shared ground for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Y: ALL THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7386 Normal Operation The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP IS INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE THROUGH THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to Z2. ------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay. - Substitute a know good relay. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7387 - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3. ------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY COIL - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z4. No REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7388 Yes GO to Z5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY USING THE RELAY GROUND - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7389 tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to AA2. ------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay. - Substitute a known good relay. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3. ------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), BJB face side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7390 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA4. No REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL USING THE RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7391 No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Lamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7392 GO to AB2. No The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. ------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn) or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7397 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7398 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7401 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7402 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7403 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7404 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Body Control Module: Service and Repair Smart Junction Box (SJB) Removal NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box (SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB. NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows: - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7411 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 4. Remove the floor console finish panel. 5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB. Installation 1. Install the SJB. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB cover. 4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6 seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming instructions, if necessary. NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. 5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. 6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful, this step clears DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. 7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position. This makes sure that all displays are visible under all lighting conditions. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair Running Board Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel. 3. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the body-to-running board bracket screw. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures Tab Repair - Bumper 1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be affected and damaged by excessively high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F). Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C (140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7421 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement Bumper Cover - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 6 pushpins from inside the front splash shield (3 each side). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center pushpins from the front bumper cover. 6. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors. 7. If equipped, disconnect the auto-park long range sensor electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front bumper cover upper bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 9. Unclip the front bumper cover from the from the front bumper mounting brackets and remove the front bumper cover. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Position the front bumper cover. - Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until the bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures Tab Repair - Bumper 1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. For additional information, refer to Bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be affected and damaged by excessively high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F). Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C (140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7427 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement Bumper Cover - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws. 2. Remove the 2 rear splash shields. - Remove the 4 splash shield pin-type retainers (2 each side). - Remove the 4 splash shield bolts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear bumper cover. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer all necessary components. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7444 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7450 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7451 Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7452 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7453 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7454 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7455 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7456 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Front Door Handle See: Exterior Front Door Handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the actuating rods. - If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle reinforcement. - Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch. 4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 7459 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 7460 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Front Door Handle Exterior Front Door Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove the exterior front door handle bezel. 1. Pull the exterior front door handle open. 2. Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle bezel and remove. 5. Remove the exterior front door handle. - Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 7461 6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page 7462 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 7467 Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Front Interior Door Handle - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Hinge: Adjustments Door Alignment - Front All alignments NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar. 1. Remove the door latch striker plate. Front door in and out, up and down alignment 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners enough to allow door alignment. Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment 3. Remove the front fender. 4. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. 5. Remove the front door scuff plate. 6. Partially remove the front door weatherstrip. 7. Remove the lower cowl trim panel. - Remove the pin-type retainer. - Remove the lower cowl trim panel. 8. Remove the front door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside A-pillar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7471 9. Position the weather shield aside and loosen, but do not remove, the front door lower hinge nut. 10. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. All alignments 11. Adjust the door. 12. Tighten the door fasteners. - Tighten the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Tighten the front door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 13. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary. - Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Upper, Front Door Hinge - Upper, Front 1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 3. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front > Page 7474 Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Lower, Front Door Hinge - Lower, Front 1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel. 4. Pull outward to release the cowl trim panel clips and remove the cowl trim panel. 5. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Door Latch: Procedures Latch Lubrication 1. Open the door. 2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (2 clicks). 3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds. 4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle. 5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch. 6. Wipe off any excess grease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7479 Front Door Latch: Removal and Replacement Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Front Door Latch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7480 Front Door Latch Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front. 4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the front door latch. - Slide the front door latch toward the front of the vehicle. - Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Door Trim Panel - Front NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Remove the door sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. 2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. - Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7484 3. Remove the door handle screw. 4. Remove the door pull cup screw cover. 5. Remove the door pull cup screw. 6. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 7. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7494 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7495 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7500 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7506 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7507 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7512 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door > Page 7515 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 7523 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door Window Regulator - Front Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 7524 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7535 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7541 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7542 Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7543 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7544 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7545 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7546 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7547 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Rear Door Handle See: Exterior Rear Door Handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch. 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 7550 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Rear Door Handle Exterior Rear Door Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the rear window channel bolt and position the window channel aside. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 5. Remove the exterior rear door handle bezel. 1. Pull the exterior rear door handle open. 2. Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle bezel and remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 7551 6. Remove the exterior rear door handle. - Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page 7552 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle from the door trim panel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments Door Alignment - Rear NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar. All alignments 1. Remove the door latch striker plate. Rear door in and out, up and down alignment 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners enough to allow door alignment. Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. 4. Remove the front door scuff plate. 5. Remove the rear door scuff plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7559 6. Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel. 7. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside B-pillar. 8. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door alignment. All alignments 9. Adjust the door. 10. Tighten the door fasteners. - Tighten the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). - Tighten the rear door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 11. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary. - Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). - To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Door Latch: Procedures Latch Lubrication 1. Open the door. 2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (2 clicks). 3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds. 4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle. 5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch. 6. Wipe off any excess grease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7564 Rear Door Latch: Removal and Replacement Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View Rear Door Latch Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7565 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear. 4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear door latch. - Slide the rear door latch toward the front of the vehicle. - Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Door Trim Panel - Rear NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. 2. Remove the door handle screw. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7569 3. Remove the door pull cup screw cover. 4. Remove the door pull cup screw. 5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 6. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7579 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7580 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7586 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7587 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 7590 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 7598 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door Window Regulator - Rear Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 7599 - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Hood Latch Removal 1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut. Loosen the hood latch nut. 2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts. Remove the 2 hood latch bolts. 3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable. 1. Release the cable conduit. 2. Disconnect the cable. 4. Remove the hood latch. 5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever. Installation 1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch. 1. Connect the cable. 2. Engage the cable conduit. 2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket. 3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts. - Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 7605 4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 7606 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View > Page 7611 Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Handle Hood Latch Release Handle Removal and Installation 1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair/Hood Latch. 2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides. - Note the routing of the hood latch release cable. 3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Breaking the tab does not require handle assembly replacement. Using a suitable tool, push up on the tab to snap it off and then slide the handle off the instrument panel. 5. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl panel into the passenger compartment. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. - Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage Liftgate Window Glass: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage TSB 11-2-9 02/07/11 BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010 FORD: 2010-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are present. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage. a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure. b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms. a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7842006 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage TSB 11-2-9 02/07/11 BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010 FORD: 2010-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are present. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage. a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure. b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms. a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7842006 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7626 Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Liftgate Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7630 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7634 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector. 3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 7637 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7641 Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7642 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Diagrams Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Diagrams Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Liftgate Trim Panel Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws. 3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips. 4. NOTE: If equipped with a rear wiper, the rear glass must be open. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the liftgate trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach to the liftgate trim panel before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 7653 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Liftgate Latch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors. 3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. Remove the liftgate latch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 7654 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch Liftgate Window Latch Removal and Installation NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch bolts. Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Diagrams Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Diagrams Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7661 Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7662 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7666 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7667 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair License Plate Housing 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector. 3. Remove the license plate housing nuts. 4. Release the license plate housing pin-type retainers from the liftgate and remove the license plate housing. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Fender Splash Shield Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Fender Splash Shield Fender Splash Shield Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Fender Splash Shield > Page 7681 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front End Body Panels - Exploded View Front End Body Panels - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Description and Operation Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation Subframe and Mounting Systems Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the engine isolators. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential All-Wheel Drive (AWD). Welding Precautions The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal Inert Gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean and free of foreign materials. - Do not weld on the subframe. - The correct protective clothing should always be worn. - Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases. - A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample. - Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of weld being used. - Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. Refer to Battery. - On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical currents when welding. - Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through painted surfaces or E-coat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7695 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7696 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7702 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7703 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7704 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7705 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7706 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7707 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7708 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7709 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7710 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7711 NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7712 All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7713 6. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). For additional information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter. 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7714 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7715 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. NOTE: When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7724 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7725 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7731 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7732 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7733 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7734 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7735 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7736 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7737 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7738 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7747 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7748 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7754 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7755 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7756 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7757 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7758 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7759 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7760 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7761 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7762 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly. All vehicles 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7763 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7772 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7773 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7779 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7780 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7786 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7787 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7788 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7789 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7790 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7791 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Grille Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper. Escape only 2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7795 3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts. 4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia. Mariner only 5. Push outward on the 12 radiator grille clips to release the radiator grille from the bumper cover and remove the radiator grille. All vehicles 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair Console: Service and Repair Console - Floor Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transmission 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. All vehicles 3. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 floor console rear bolts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Position the seats rearward. Vehicles with an automatic transmission 5. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transmission 6. Disengage the gear shift boot trim ring. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7800 7. Remove the floor console storage bin. 8. Remove the floor console finish panel. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 9. Remove the 8 floor console bolts and remove the floor console. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7806 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7807 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7808 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7809 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7810 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7811 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7816 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7817 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7818 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7819 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7820 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7821 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim Panel. 2. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/B-Pillar Trim Panel. 3. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/C-Pillar Trim Panel. 4. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/D-Pillar Trim Panel. 5. Open the overhead console door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7825 6. NOTE: The overhead console is also supported by a retaining clip. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips. - Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. - Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner. 9. Remove the interior lamp assembly. - Pull straight downward to release pushpins. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 10. Remove the cargo lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 11. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers. 12. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 13. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and have no gaps or overlaps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7826 If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring. 14. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers. 15. Remove the headliner. 16. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer parts as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View Trim Panel: Service and Repair Interior Trim - Exploded View Interior Trim - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7831 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7832 Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel A-Pillar Trim Panel Removal All trim panels 1. Position the LH or RH front door weatherstrips aside. Passenger side only 2. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screw covers. 3. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screws and remove the assist handle. All trim panels 4. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips. Driver side only 5. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is being installed. Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. - Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip. - Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards. All trim panels 6. Remove the A-pillar trim panel. Installation All trim panels 1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel. Driver side only 2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does not fasten correctly. During a side air curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel. - Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully seated. 3. NOTICE: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will occur. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the A-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the A-pillar trim panel before installing. NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar. Passenger side only Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7833 4. Install the A-pillar assist handle and install the screws. 5. Install the A-pillar assist handle screw covers. All trim panels 6. Install the LH or RH front door opening weatherstrips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7834 Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel B-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation Upper 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Position the front and rear door opening weatherstrips aside. 4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt. Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Lower 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the 2 pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. All vehicles 8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the B-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the B-pillar trim panel before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7835 Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel C-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel . 4. Position the rear door opening weatherstrip aside. 5. Release the C-pillar coat hook by inserting a small flat screwdriver in the slot at the base of the coat hook. 6. Remove the coat hook. - For LH coat hook, twist clockwise. - For RH coat hook, twist counterclockwise. 7. Remove the C-pillar trim panel bolt. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the C-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the C-pillar trim panel before installing. Remove the C-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7836 Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel D-Pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel . 2. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the D-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and attach them to the D-pillar trim panel before installing. Remove the D-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Diagrams Utility Storage Compartment: Diagrams Instrument Panel - Exploded View Instrument Panel Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7840 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder Removal and Installation NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 1. Release the clips. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Key: Testing and Inspection Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys NOTE: This procedure only works if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment. NOTE: The Instrument Cluster (IC) PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate. If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Switch State Control, in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to ENABLE when the vehicle is built. NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the appropriate pinpoint tests. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the IC before the vehicle starts. If the MyKey(TM) function is enabled, one or both of the keys must be administrator (admin) keys. NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions. Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends. NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function, but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle. 1. Insert a programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. Leave the first key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 3. Turn the first key to the OFF position and remove the first key. 4. Within 10 seconds of turning the first key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 5. Leave the second key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the second key to the OFF position and remove the key. 7. Within 20 seconds of turning the second key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed PATS ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the new key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key in the ON position for a minimum of 6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7850 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if programming an IKT key). 8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the vehicle. Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions. 9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7. Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory. NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box (SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the vehicle. NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before the vehicle starts. NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key. NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be enabled. NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. From the scan tool menu select: "Ignition Key Code Erase". Follow all IDS on-screen instructions until the key erase procedure completes. The scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process. 4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are programmed into the IC, the RKE data transfers from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB, the RKE function does not operate. NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds. Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7851 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place). 8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT should function. 9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC, of which only 4 can be IKT keys), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset NOTE: A minimum of 2 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) to complete this procedure and allow the vehicle to start. 1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics . 3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE: If the IC or the IC and the PCM were replaced, updated or reconfigured, follow Steps 4-9. All vehicle keys are erased during the parameter reset procedure. Verify at least 2 vehicle keys are available prior to carrying out the PATS parameter reset. If only the PCM was replaced, go to Step 9. From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool. 6. Turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds. 7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the key. 8. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds. 9. Both keys now start the vehicle. 10. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. 11. Program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) PATS keys. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks. Key Programming Switch State Control Key Programming Switch State Control Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7852 NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key programming procedure available to the vehicle driver. NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID. NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLE, the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This PID only affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. 1. NOTE: The key used in this step does not have to be an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key. A conventional Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) key can also be used, as long as it has first been successfully programmed to this vehicle. Insert a programmed PATS IKT key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLE, when viewing the IC SPAREKEY PID. From the scan tool menu select: "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" - spare key programming procedure is accessible. - "Customer Spare Key Programming Disable" - spare key programming procedure is not accessible. Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode Enabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for their vehicle. NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC) will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly. NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder security key code and programming this key code into all Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7853 of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code. NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed). 1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F. 2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be turned off before viewing the stored code. At this time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below. Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should not be the same key code. 3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition key to OFF (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 8. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 9. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 10. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 11. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation. 12. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. Disabling Unlimited Key Mode NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the vehicle. 1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions. 4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF (the key does not need to be removed at this time). 5. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key). 8. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation. 9. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into the IC using the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7854 If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE. Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key can be programmed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available. NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) can be determined by viewing the Instrument Cluster (IC) PID N_KEYCODE. 1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position. 2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. 3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will be erased from the system. From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key". 4. NOTE: The 20-second delay is to allow sufficient time for the module to exit its diagnostic mode. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (wait 20 seconds). 5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7855 Key: Testing and Inspection MyKey(TM) MyKey(TM) Programming Program a MyKey(TM) NOTE: After a MyKey(TM) has been programmed, the remaining standard key(s) (the key[s] that is not programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature) is referred to as an "administrator key(s)" or "admin" key(s). There must always be at least one admin key. The Instrument Cluster (IC) does not allow the last admin key to be programmed into a MyKey(TM) restricted key. Both the admin key and the MyKey(TM) restricted key can be used to see how many MyKey(TM) and admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey(TM) feature active (using the message center). The MyKey(TM) is the one with the restricted status. The admin key does not have any restrictions. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was programmed. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If the key has been cycled, an admin key is required to disable the MyKey(TM) programming. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can only be configured or disabled with an admin key. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature allows you to program/configure a restricted driving mode on one (or more) standard key(s) supplied with the vehicle or any (Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)) programmed spare key(s) to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be programmed to a MyKey(TM) restricted key status. The MyKey(TM) is a restricted key for consecutive key cycles until the MyKey(TM) feature is disabled. When the MyKey(TM) feature is programmed, several features are modified/or can be modified: NOTE: The standard restricted features below cannot be configured in any way. Standard Restricted Features - Belt-Minder(R) chimes periodically with the audio system muted until the driver safety belt is buckled. If Belt-Minder(R) has been disabled when the admin key is in the ignition lock cylinder, Belt-Minder(R) still functions for the MyKey(TM) driver. Belt-Minder(R) cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver. - Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) low fuel warnings are issued when the Distance To Empty (DTE) value is reached (typically 75 miles). - The parking aid system (if equipped) cannot be turned off. NOTE: The optional restricted features below can be configured to the customer preferences. Refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features. Optional Restricted Features - If configured, the audio system limits the volume to 45% of the maximum volume. The message MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed if an attempt is made to exceed the volume limit of 45%. - If configured, vehicle maximum speed can be limited to 130 km/h (80 mph). Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the vehicle speed of 130 km/h (80 mph) is attained. The PCM automatically limits the vehicle speed to not exceed 130 km/h (80 mph). - If configured, audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the preselected vehicle speed of 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) is attained. - If configured, the AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature can be configured to on or off. If configured to always on, the traction control cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver when a MyKey(TM) is being used to operate the vehicle. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays. 1. NOTE: The key that is being programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature must first already be programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS). Insert a programmed PATS ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF to the ON position. This key must be the one that is being programmed to the MyKey(TM) restricted status. 2. Using the message center buttons: 1. Press the SETUP button until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY appears in the message center display. 2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY is displayed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7856 3. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately 2 seconds) until MARK THIS KEY AS RESTRICTED is displayed. 4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed, then release the RESET button. 3. The MyKey(TM) feature (standard restricted features) is successfully programmed into this particular key. Make sure it is labeled for easy identification. To customize the MyKey(TM) with the audio volume limited, maximum speed limit, speed alert chimes, and AdvanceTrac(R) on/off restrictions, refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features. If the vehicle is equipped with remote start, also refer to Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start Systems. Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features NOTE: The following features can be restricted on a MyKey(TM): - audio volume level set to a pre-determined level (45% of the maximum volume) - maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (80 mph) on or off - speed alert chimes set for 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) - AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature turned on or off 1. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays. To configure the MyKey(TM) optional restricted features listed directly above, carry out the following: 1. Using an admin key that has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM), turn the key to the ON position. 2. Press and hold the SETUP button until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed. 3. Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey(TM) setup menus. The first programmable feature is: MYKEY MAX MPH [80 MPH] OFF. To change the status of a feature that appears, press SETUP to accept the current setting and the message center displays the next feature. - To change the status of the feature that is displayed, press RESET to turn a feature on/off (or toggle between choices). After the feature selection has been made, press and release SETUP to accept and the message center displays the next feature. 4. Repeat the process for the next features: - MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 [OFF] (choose the desired speed for the chime to sound) - MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT [ON] OFF (choose the audio volume to be limited to 45%) - MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON [OFF] (choose for the AdvanceTrac(R) to be automatically locked on or able to be turned on or off by the MyKey(TM) driver) Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features 1. NOTE: This procedure is used to disable the MyKey(TM) feature on all of the keys that are programmed to the vehicle. All of the keys then operate as normal (admin) keys with no restrictions. Insert an admin key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position. 2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY appears. 3. Press and hold RESET until HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR and ALL KEYS ARE CLEARED is displayed. - A MyKey(TM) can also be cleared during the same key cycle that it was programmed by following Steps 2 and 3 of this procedure. Check MyKey(TM) System Status 1. The vehicle system check provides the status of the following MyKey(TM) parameters: - MYKEY DISTANCE - This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey(TM) is used. If mileage does not accumulate, the intended MyKey(TM) is not being used or the IC is at fault. The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling the MyKey(TM). If this odometer is lower than the last time it was checked, the MyKey(TM) system has been cleared. If desired, it may be necessary to program the MyKey(TM) restricted features into the key. - # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many MyKeys(TM) are programmed to the vehicle. It can also be used to determine if a MyKey(TM) has been disabled. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7857 - # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle. It can also be used to determine if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle. Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start System NOTE: The # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or the # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED messages that may be displayed in the message center includes the remote start system as an additional key in the total count, depending on whether or not it was programmed as a MyKey(TM). Refer to the Check MyKey(TM) System Status to determine if this is the case. NOTE: The MyKey(TM) system is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle and it is started using the remote start, the vehicle stalls if a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. The driver must insert their key into the ignition lock cylinder, cycle the ignition to the ON position and drive the vehicle with the MyKey(TM) restrictions that are programmed into their MyKey(TM). If the remote start system is a non-Ford approved system, the vehicle may not stall when a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. If the remote start system has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM) and the driver is a MyKey(TM) driver, the driver could possibly drive the vehicle using the remote start system as an admin key with no MyKey(TM) restrictions. To resolve this incompatibility, it is necessary to either recycle the MyKey(TM) before the vehicle is driven or program the non-Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey(TM). NOTE: It is possible to program all of the keys as MyKeys(TM), with the remote start system being the lone remaining admin key. In this particular case, it may be necessary to use the remote start system to clear all MyKeys(TM) and turn them into admin keys. In order to do this, carry out the following: - Enter the vehicle and close all doors. - Remote start the vehicle using the remote start fob. - Follow Steps 1-3 of the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure. 1. When using a Ford approved remote start system, the standard restricted features recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key. If the remote start system is not Ford approved, it may not operate correctly. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle, the remote start system can be programmed as a MyKey(TM), in addition to the key that is also programmed as a MyKey(TM). To program the remote start system as a MyKey(TM), follow the steps below: 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. 2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob. 3. Follow Steps 1-3 of the Program a MyKey(TM) procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7862 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7863 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming Programming a Personal Entry Code NOTE: The system allows 3 personal codes to be programmed. NOTE: Multiple personal codes can be programmed in one step. When programming multiple codes in one step, each code must be programmed by entering each button within 5 seconds of each other. If 5 seconds elapse between any button press, programming mode is exited. NOTE: If only a single personal code is desired or unable to program multiple codes in one step, each personal code can be programmed individually by repeating Steps 1-5 for each code desired. 1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad to activate the programming mode. 3. Enter the new personal 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within 5 seconds of each other. 4. After entering the new personal code, press a 6th button to program each new code. - Pressing 1/2 stores the first personal code. - Pressing 3/4 stores the second personal code. - Pressing 5/6, 7/8 or 9/0 stores the third personal code. 5. The door locks lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing a Personal Entry Code 1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5-digit code works. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 7864 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair Keyless Entry Keypad Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems or Antitheft and Alarm Systems to program the IKT. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time. NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed 5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7869 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7870 doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button twice. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7871 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming Stepped Unlock Programming 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear > Page 7877 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7880 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit, Passenger Side Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7881 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7882 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 7887 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7890 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7891 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7892 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7893 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7894 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7895 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Diagrams Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Diagrams Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Motor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass See: Service and Repair/Exterior Mirror Glass. 2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw. 3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs. 4. Remove the exterior mirror motor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7906 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7907 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7908 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7909 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7910 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7911 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7916 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7917 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7922 Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7925 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7926 Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7927 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7930 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7931 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7932 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7936 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7940 Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7941 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7948 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor Roof Opening Panel Motor Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws and the roof opening panel motor. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7952 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7953 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7954 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7955 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7960 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Trough Assembly Trough Assembly Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Glass See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Roof Opening Panel Glass. 2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Diagrams Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7968 Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Frame Roof Opening Panel Frame Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses. 3. Release the wire harness locators. 4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame. - To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel glass is centered and aligned correctly. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7972 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7977 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass Roof Opening Panel Glass NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Position the roof opening panel to the CLOSED position. 2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass. - To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7978 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield Roof Opening Panel Shield Removal and Installation NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Remove the roof opening panel drain trough. For additional information, refer to Trough Assembly See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair/Trough Assembly. 2. Slide the roof opening panel shield forward halfway. 3. Disengage the roof opening panel shield guide feet. - Lift the front portion of the roof opening panel shield upward at center until able to disengage one of the front guide feet. 4. With one of the guide feet released, carefully rotate the roof opening panel shield in a clockwise manner to disengage the remaining guide feet. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Power Seat Motor: Exploded Views Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7985 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7986 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7987 Power Seat Motor: Connector Views Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7988 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7994 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7995 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7996 Power Seat Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7997 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7998 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7999 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Back: Removal and Replacement Seat Backrest - Front Seat Backrest - Front Removal and Installation NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat Front. 2. Remove the recliner handle. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the outboard side shield forward. Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip. - For driver seat, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the inboard side shield. - For driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws. - For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook. 5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. - Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion. 7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover. 9. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector. - Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track bolts (manual seat) and backrest. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Seat Backrest - Rear Seat Backrest - Rear Removal NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest (60 percent). NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Rear. Both rear seat backrests Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8004 1. Position both rear seat cushions forward. 2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps. 3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. LH rear seat backrest 4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt. 5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. Both rear seat backrests 6. Release and position both rear backrests downward. 7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside. 8. Remove the bolt cover. 9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. 10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest. LH rear seat backrest 11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. 12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest. Installation NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest (40 percent). NOTE: The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. LH rear seat backrest 1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time. RH rear seat backrest 3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8005 4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Install the bolt cover. 6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers. 9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests. 10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH rear seat backrest 12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps. 14. Position both rear seat cushions in place. Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8006 Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8007 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8008 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8009 Seat Back: Overhaul Seat Backrest - Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger similar. Disassembly WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. 1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8010 2. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat Backrest Cover - Front. 3. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers. 4. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module. 5. Remove the backrest foam pad. 6. If equipped, remove the lumbar assembly. - Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjuster. - Release the lumbar assembly from the backrest frame wires and remove. Assembly WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: - Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. 1. If equipped, install the lumbar assembly. - Install the lumbar assembly to the backrest frame wires. - Install the lumbar adjuster and 2 screws. 2. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 4. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame. 5. Install the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat Backrest Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8011 Cover - Front. 6. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. Seat Backrest - Rear Seat Backrest - Rear NOTE: LH (60 percent) shown, RH (40 percent) similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8012 Disassembly and Assembly Both rear seat backrests 1. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Rear See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat Backrest Cover - Rear. 2. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. Sixty percent seat backrest 3. Release the seat latch cable from the center safety belt retractor. - For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode after installation. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems. 4. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the nut and center safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 6. Remove the 2 bolts and backrest latch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8013 - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Remove the bolt and inboard pivot bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 8. Remove the bolt and outboard pivot bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8018 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8019 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8020 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Front Seat Backrest Cover - Front Removal and Installation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering 2. Press the buttons and remove the head restraint. 3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides. 4. If equipped, remove the lumbar adjust knob. 5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest cover. 6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the elastic loop in the backrest trim cover. 7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam. Partially invert the backrest cover up to the side air bag. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8021 - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip. 9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest foam pad. Note positioning of the deployment chute for correct installation. 10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover. 11. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8022 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Front Seat Cushion Cover - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion; it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Restraint Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front. 2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion - Front. 3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. - If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation. 4. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 6. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8023 the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset. 7. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Restraint Systems. 9. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8024 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Rear Seat Backrest Cover - Rear NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Rear. 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Rear See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Rear. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Pull up and remove the 2 or 4 head restraint guide sleeves. - Note the alignment tab position for correct installation. 4. Remove the 2 screws and latch cover. 5. Remove the 2 seat latch release handle screws. 6. Remove the seat latch release handle. 1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release handle. - To aid removal and installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before disconnecting and connecting the latch rod. 2. Remove the seat latch release handle. 7. Release the backrest cover J-clip. 8. Unzip the backrest cover zipper. 9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield. 10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop strips, invert and remove the seat backrest cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8025 11. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion Cover - Rear Seat Cushion Cover - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. 2. Unzip the cushion cover zipper. 3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Invert and remove the cushion cover. 4. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Seat Cushion - Front Seat Cushion - Front Removal and Installation NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. All seats Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8030 1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 2. NOTE: To identify between a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. NOTE: If removing a production OCS system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure in Restraint Systems. Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical connectors. - For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. Heated seat 3. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover. 4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. All seats 6. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame. - Note wiring harness routing for correct installation. 7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Remove the seat cushion. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front. Passenger seat 11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 12. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8031 - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 13. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Restraint Systems. 14. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8032 Seat Cushion: Overhaul Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side NOTE: Seat equipped with a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system shown. For OCS system service components, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit procedure in Restraint Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8033 Disassembly NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Restraint Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. All seats 1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat Front. 2. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation. Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8034 5. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. 6. If equipped, disconnect the heated seat system components. - Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. - Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. - Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector. Seat with original equipment Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system 7. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1. Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. - Detach the wiring harness retainers and wiring harness from the cushion frame. 8. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover. 9. Remove the cushion foam pad. 10. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 11. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8035 12. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 13. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Seat with OCS system service kit 14. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame. 15. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover. 16. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 17. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame. 18. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion frame opening. Assembly All seats 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8036 Seat with original equipment OCS system 2. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat cushion frame. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the Restraints Control Module (RCM). 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame. 8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the cushion frame. 9. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8037 10. Install the wiring harness. 1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. - Attach the wiring harness to the cushion frame. Seat with OCS system service kit 11. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and support assembly for any foreign objects, before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Route the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion frame. 12. NOTE: When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion frame. 1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. - When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3. Install the rivets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8038 13. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the seat cushion frame. 14. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system electrical connector. - Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame. - Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. - Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside. All seats 16. If equipped, connect the heated seat components. - Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame. - Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector. - Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame. 17. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track. 18. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors. - Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame. - Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 19. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. 20. Install the seat. Do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front. 21. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8039 NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and less than 18 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before carrying out the OCS system reset process. Carry out the OCS system reset. 22. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the following and repair any concerns found. - OCS system connector and wiring for damage - Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage - Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage 23. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in Restraint Systems. 24. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool. Seat Cushion - Rear Seat Cushion - Rear NOTE: RH (40 percent) shown, LH (60 percent) similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8040 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. 2. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Unzip the cushion cover zipper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8041 3. Invert and remove the cushion cover. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and cushion pivot upper link. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Seat Cushion - Driver Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8042 Disassembly 1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. 2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). - Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness. - Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 6. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release the all the retainers and remove the cushion cover. 7. Remove the cushion foam pad. - If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation. 8. If equipped, release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. - Disconnect the relay electrical connector. 9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8047 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8048 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8049 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8050 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8051 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8052 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8053 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8054 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8055 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8056 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8057 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8058 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8059 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8060 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8061 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 Seat Heater: Exploded Views Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8069 Seat Heater: Connector Views Backrest and Cushion Heater Mats, Driver Side Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8070 Backrest and Cushion Heater Mats, Passenger Side Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8071 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8072 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8073 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 119-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8074 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8078 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8079 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8084 Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8088 Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8089 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8092 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8093 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8094 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8099 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8100 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8101 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track Seat Track Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front. 2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track. - If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector. - Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. Note wiring harness routing for correct installation. 4. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8106 Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8107 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Track > Page 8108 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8114 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8117 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8118 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8119 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8120 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8121 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8122 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8126 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8127 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8128 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8129 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8130 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8131 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Exterior Mirror Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8137 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8138 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8139 Power Seat Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8141 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8146 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector. 3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8149 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat - Exploded View, Front Seat Backrest - Front NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. Seat Cushion - Driver NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8154 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8155 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8156 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Seat Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front. 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the outboard side shield. - Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the knob and seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8160 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8161 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8162 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8163 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8167 Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8168 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8172 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Insulation Insulation Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the interior of the vehicle. Mastic insulators are also used as insulation. For information on the location of the mastic insulators, refer to Sound Deadeners and Insulators. Insulation is installed: - under the roof. - above and below the instrument panel. - at the cowl side panels. - over the front and rear floor pans. - inside the A-, B-, D-pillar sections. - behind the rear quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation > Page 8178 Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators Sound Deadeners and Insulators WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to burn. NOTICE: Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied. Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur. NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. NOTE: The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration. Floor Pan Sound Deadeners NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Insulation > Page 8179 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Panel Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8194 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8195 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8200 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8206 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8207 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8212 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8215 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Window Glass - Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8224 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8225 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8231 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8232 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8235 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8240 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8241 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8244 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch > Page 8252 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8257 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8258 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8261 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Cruise Control Switch NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar. Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch > Page 8269 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Cruise Control Deactivator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn. 3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch. 4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to the correct position. Do not pull up or push down on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel center finish panel. 1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute. 2. Lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector. - Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8278 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8279 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8280 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8281 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8282 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8283 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 44-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation Compass: Description and Operation Electronic Compass The compass display is on with the key in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or START position, there is a momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass display illuminates. If the battery saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START, the momentary delay before the compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The compass display turns off as soon as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position. With Navigation The compass display is incorporated into the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM). Refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. The compass signal originates from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. No calibration or zone adjustment is available, as the compass heading is based on the GPS signal. Refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the upper RH side of the FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). Without Navigation The compass display is incorporated into the FDIM. The compass signal originates from the compass module, which is integrated into the interior rear view mirror. Refer to Mirrors. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower LH side of the FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The compass continuously re-calibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate during most driving conditions. The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) buttons that allow the driver to operate (change) the calibration and zone setting procedures are located below the FDIM. Compass Accuracy Without Navigation Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects, calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Refer to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. With Navigation Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures have no effect on the compass heading. Compass calibration and compass zone setting procedures are not required if the vehicle is equipped with navigation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Electronic Compass Inspection and Verification Electronic Compass Inspection and Verification NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8304 - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the FDIM and the Instrument Cluster (IC). 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8305 Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Electronic Compass DTC Charts Instrument Cluster (IC) DTC Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8306 Compass: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electronic Compass Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8307 Compass: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative Electronic Compass Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 124 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Mirrors for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A). The compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM displays the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC. - DTC B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the IC attempts a self-test of the compass module and its associated circuits and a failure results. - DTC U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the IC does not receive any communications from the compass module. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse(s) - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Compass module - FDIM (compass display) - IC PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE COMPASS DISPLAY - Ignition ON. - Check the compass display. - Does the compass display illuminate? Yes If the compass display illuminates with only 2 bars, GO to A3. If the compass display turns on, but it does not display all directions, or indicates CAL, GO to Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate No GO to A2. ------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8308 - Verify the vehicle is equipped with the compass feature. - Is the vehicle equipped with the compass feature? Yes REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment to diagnose the FDIM display. No RETURN the vehicle to the customer and ADVISE them the vehicle is not equipped with a compass display feature. ------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR POWER CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012 (Without Camera Mirror, Without SYNC), C9030 (Without Camera Mirror, With SYNC) or C9039 (With Camera Mirror, With SYNC). - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows: - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to A4. No VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8309 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to A5. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK THE COMPASS (+) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND - Disconnect: IC C220. - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and the IC, harness side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8310 - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground? Yes GO to A6. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK THE COMPASS (-) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND - Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and the IC, harness side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows: - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater than 10,000 ohms between the interior Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8311 rear view mirror and ground? Yes GO to A7. No REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK FOR DTC U2013 - Connect: Negative Battery Cable. - Connect: IC C220. - Connect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012 (Without Camera Mirror, Without SYNC), C9030 (Without Camera Mirror, With SYNC) or C9039 (With Camera Mirror, With SYNC). - Ignition ON. - Clear the DTCs. - Ignition OFF. - Ignition ON. - Wait 10 seconds. - Retrieve the IC DTCs. - Is DTC U2013 present? Yes INSTALL a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). REFER to Interior Rear View Mirror in Mirrors. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to A8. ------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION - Disconnect the IC connector. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. RESET the parameters in both the IC and the PCM. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. PROGRAM the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys into the new IC. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate Electronic Compass Pinpoint Tests Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8312 Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to Accessories and Optional Equipment. Normal Operation The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A). The compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The FDIM displays the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the IC. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Compass zone setting - Compass calibration - Compass module PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE COMPASS ACCURACY - Set the zone. Refer to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. - Calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. - Position the vehicle and observe the compass display as follows: - Does the compass display as indicated? Yes The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting or the compass was out of calibration. No INSTALL a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). REFER to Interior Rear View Mirror in Mirrors. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment Compass Zone Adjustment NOTE: This procedure is only applicable to vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, there is no compass zone adjustment. 1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the geographic location of the vehicle. 2. With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) 7 and 9 buttons (for approximately 5 seconds) until the compass display shows the current zone setting (ZONE XX). Release the 7 and 9 buttons. 3. NOTE: After the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons have been released for approximately 5 seconds, the compass display exits the zone setting mode. Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the 7 and 9 buttons to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map. 4. Release the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 8315 Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration Compass Calibration NOTE: This procedure is only applicable to vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, there is no compass calibration. 1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects or structures such as bridges, steel buildings, etc. Switch off all non-essential electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make sure all doors are closed. Start the vehicle. 2. NOTE: The vehicle remains in the CAL mode until the compass has been successfully calibrated. NOTE: While holding the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) 7 and 9 buttons down, the compass display first enters the ZONE setting mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (approximately 10 seconds total), the compass display enters the CAL mode. Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons until the CAL indicator appears in the display, then release the buttons. 3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times, repeat the procedure. Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until the CAL indicator disappears from the display and the compass heading is shown. 4. If the CAL message does not turn off after driving in a circle at least 5 times (and the procedure has been repeated at least once), install a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). For additional information, refer to Interior Rear View Mirror in Mirrors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8321 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8322 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8323 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8324 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8325 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8326 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8331 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8332 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8333 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8334 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8335 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8336 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8343 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8344 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 8348 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 8349 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 8352 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Message Center Switch Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Check Fuel Cap Indicator The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 8360 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8363 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8364 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8365 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8366 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8372 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8373 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8374 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8375 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8376 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8377 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number 4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8382 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8383 Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation Deactivation WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and cause serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON. NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8384 6. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Separate the weatherstrip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8385 2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB. 14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8386 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8387 NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2. Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the instrument panel. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Reset Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset > Page 8405 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Start Value Message Center Configuration Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Information And Message Center Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life. On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK ON [OFF]. For additional information on configurable items, refer to the Owner's Literature. The setup display modes are: - Reset to English (if set in another language) - System check - Oil life reset/oil life starting value - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off - Auto-unlock on/off - Language Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value The oil life is displayed in percentages and is preset to a maximum of 12,070 km (7,500 miles)/180 days (non-hybrid) or 12,070 km (7,500 miles) one year (hybrid). The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. Each 10% reduction lowers the oil life in both mileage and the days. For example, if the oil life start value is lowered to 50%, the maximum mileage is 6,035 km (3,750 miles)/90 days (non-hybrid) or 6,035 km (3,750 miles) 6 months (hybrid). The oil life remains at the selected setting (50% in this example) until the driver changes the oil life start value. When the oil life (not oil life start value) is reset back to 100% following an oil change, the oil life resets to 6,035 km (3,750 miles). For configuration of the oil life and oil life start value, refer to Message Center Configuration See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Service and Repair/Reset Procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8412 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. NOTE: The XXXs in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8416 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8417 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8418 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8419 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8423 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Parking Aid Sensor NOTE: Bumper shown removed for clarity. Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Using a suitable tool, (such as a flat-blade screwdriver), gently pry the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Using the scan tool, verify that the parking aid sensor PIDs read no object present and that the parking aid sensor attenuation PIDs read between 0.8-1.6 ms. - Carry out the azimuth and elevation system check to verify the sensor(s) are operating correctly. For additional information, refer to Azimuth System Check See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Azimuth System Check and Elevation System Check See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Elevation System Check. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8427 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8428 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8429 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering TSB 10-16-3 08/30/10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010 FORD: 2010 Escape MERCURY: 2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas. ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15604 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool. 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation, however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R) once again reverts to the disabled state. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating Preparation NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool. 1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R). 2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual transaxle). 3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 4. Close all the vehicle doors. 5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts. Deactivating/Activating NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position. NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation, however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R) once again reverts to the disabled state. 1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute). 3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns off. For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3 times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state. - After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds. 4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. - This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds. - This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds. 5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8457 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8458 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 8463 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8466 Fuel Tank Supports Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8467 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8468 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module Fuel Pump Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover. 4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8469 7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module. Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately 4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange. 8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump (FP) module when removing the lock ring. NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal. Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring. 9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP module lock ring. - Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8473 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8474 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8475 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. - To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 8481 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 8482 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8491 Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8494 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8495 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8500 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8501 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8505 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8506 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8511 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8512 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8513 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8514 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8515 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8516 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8517 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8518 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8519 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8520 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8521 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8522 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8523 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8524 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8525 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8526 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8527 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8528 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8529 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8530 Brake Lamp: Connector Views Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8531 Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8532 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8533 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8534 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8535 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Stoplamps Inspection and Verification Stoplamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8538 - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation Stoplamps Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The SJB monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies voltage to the rear stoplamps. Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection Field-Effect Transistor (FET) is a type of transistor that when used with module software can be used to monitor and control current flow on module outputs. The FET protection strategy is used to prevent module damage in the event of excessive current flow. The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, a headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault event is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter is started. When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the FET circuit protection to allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been shut down by a previous short (FET protection) and the circuit remains shorted, the FET protection shuts off the circuit again and the cumulative counter advances. When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. Each FET protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance based on the harmful effect of each circuit fault on the FET and the ability of the FET to withstand it. A module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the FET. If the total tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would be 200, 400 and 600 fault events. When each tolerance level is reached, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), DTC B106E and the associated continuous DTC (the DTC related to the shorted circuit) automatically clear and the circuit function returns. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC (associated with the short circuit) sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs can be cleared using the module on-demand self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool (if the on-demand test shows the fault corrected). The module never resets the fault event counter to zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur. If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then DTCs B106F and B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced. The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are the LH and RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8539 Brake Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Stoplamps Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8540 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB provides voltage to the rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is applied. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - SJB PINPOINT TEST I: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278. - Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to I2. No VERIFY the SJB fuse 2 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to I3. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- I2 BYPASS THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Connect a fused jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and the stoplamp switch C278-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8541 - Are the stoplamps illuminated? Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side and the SJB C2280d-13, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to I4. No REPAIR SBP02 (YE/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8542 Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp. When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps. NOTE: SJB fuse 6 (20A) supplies voltage for both combination rear stop/turn lamps and both front turn lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - High mounted stoplamp - Bulb holder - SJB PINPOINT TEST J: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Due to varying wattage ratings and resulting current draw, certain trailer accessory kits can cause the SJB to shut down the short circuit protection, resulting in the stoplamps becoming inoperative. Verify that the trailer accessory kit is Ford authorized. If the accessory kit is not Ford authorized, disconnect the trailer accessory kit from the vehicle and inform the operator of the correct type of accessory kit required for the vehicle and trailer tow lighting to operate correctly. Run the SJB on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs and reset the SJB). Test the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP - Ignition OFF. - Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps. - Are all the stoplamps inoperative? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8543 Yes GO to Pinpoint Test H See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Autolamps/Pinpoint Test H: The Autolamps Are On Continuously No For the high mounted stoplamp, GO to J2. If only one side (the LH or RH rear stoplamp) is inoperative, GO to J6. If both sides (LH and RH rear stoplamps) are inoperative, VERIFY the SJB fuse 6 (20A) is OK. If OK, GO to J4. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. After the repair: If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP - Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C475. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/GY), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J3. No REPAIR CCB08 (VT/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/GY), harness side and the high mounted stoplamp C475-2, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8544 No REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LH STOPLAMP - Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C4035. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to J5. ------------------------------------------------- J5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SJB - Disconnect: SJB C2280b. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J12. No REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J6 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB SELF-TEST - Clear the DTCs and repeat the on-demand self-test. - Is DTC B2045 or DTC B2047 present? Yes GO to J7. No GO to J10. ------------------------------------------------- J7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8545 - Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp. - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to J8. No GO to J9. ------------------------------------------------- J8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the LH rear lamp C4035-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the RH rear lamp C4032-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side. Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. No REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- J9 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes GO to J12. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8546 REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. ------------------------------------------------- J10 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp. - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test. - Clear the DTCs and repeat the self-test (required to enable the stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to J11. ------------------------------------------------- J11 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Disconnect: LH and RH Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relays. - Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? Yes GO to J12. No REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) (LH rear stoplamp) or circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) (RH rear stoplamp) for a short to ground. After the repair: If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation. If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- J12 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8547 - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously Stoplamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box (SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, and the PCM. When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay. - DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit. - DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. - DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - PCM - SJB PINPOINT TEST K: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY ------------------------------------------------- K1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE ILLUMINATED - Ignition OFF. - Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released. - Are all of the stoplamps illuminated? Yes GO to K3. No GO to K2. ------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8548 - Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Yes If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to K7. ------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH - Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278. - Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Yes GO to K4 . No INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK THE PCM - Disconnect: PCM C175b. Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate? Yes GO to K5. No GO to K6. ------------------------------------------------- K5 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE - Disconnect: SJB C2280b. - Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate? Yes REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No GO to K7. ------------------------------------------------- K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION - Disconnect all the PCM connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8549 Yes INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------- K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION - Disconnect all the SJB connectors. - Check for: corrosion - damaged pins - pushed-out pins - Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly. - Operate the system and verify the concern is still present. - Is the concern still present? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8553 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8554 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8557 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8558 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8562 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8563 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8564 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8572 Interior Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8573 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8574 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8579 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8580 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8581 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8582 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8583 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8584 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8585 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8586 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8587 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8588 Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8589 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8590 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8591 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8592 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8593 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8594 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8595 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8596 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8597 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8598 Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 97-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8599 97-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inspection and Verification Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 4. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. 5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 6. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC). 8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems Information or Body Control Systems. 9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8602 The SJB controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include: - Ignition switch position - Headlamp switch position - Headlamps on or off - Transmission gear selection (automatic transaxle) - Parking brake applied or released (manual transaxle) When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to Information Bus for additional information on this programmable parameter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8603 Daytime Running Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8604 Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AC: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative Normal Operation When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the Smart Junction Box (SJB) provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Exterior lighting system input/output - SJB configuration - Ignition switch input - Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle) - Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle) - SJB PINPOINT TEST AC: THE DRL ARE INOPERATIVE ------------------------------------------------- AC1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION - Ignition ON. - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - If equipped with an automatic transaxle, place the gear selector lever in any gear other than PARK (P). - If equipped with a manual transaxle, release the parking brake. - Do the DRL illuminate? Yes The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the DRL to operate correctly. No GO to AC2. ------------------------------------------------- AC2 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs - Review the recorded results from the SJB self-test. - Are any DTCs present? Yes REFER to Body Control Systems. No GO to AC3. ------------------------------------------------- AC3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS - Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions (including autolamps if equipped) and observe the headlamps. - Do the headlamps and autolamps (if equipped) operate correctly? Yes GO to AC4. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8605 No REFER to Headlamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection or Autolamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection. ------------------------------------------------- AC4 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger. - Monitor the SJB ignition switch PIDs (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU) while cycling the ignition switch through all positions (states). - Do the PIDs agree with the ignition switch positions? Yes For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, GO to AC5. For vehicles with a manual transaxle, GO to AC6. No REFER to Steering Column. ------------------------------------------------- AC5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT - Ignition ON. - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: PCM DataLogger. - Monitor the PCM transaxle gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through all its positions. - Does the PID agree with the gear selection? Yes GO to AC7. No REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems. ------------------------------------------------- AC6 CHECK THE BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR OPERATION - Ignition ON. - Apply and release the parking brake while observing the brake warning indicator. - Does the brake warning indicator operate correctly? Yes GO to AC7. No REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. ------------------------------------------------- AC7 CHECK THE SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION - Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Module Programming. - Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled. - Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled? Yes INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation. No Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8606 ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim. 2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from behind. Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Interior Lamp Removal and Installation 1. Open the overhead console storage door to access the screws. - Remove the 2 screws. 2. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8616 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8617 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Fog Lamp Bulb Mariner Escape Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTICE: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8622 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. Escape 2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. - Position the fender splash shield aside. 4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector. 5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp. Mariner 6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove. - Disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8627 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8628 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8629 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8630 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8631 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8632 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8633 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8634 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8635 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8636 Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8637 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8638 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8639 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8640 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8641 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8642 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8643 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8644 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8645 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8646 Hazard Warning Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8647 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTICE: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. 1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector. 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8655 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8658 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8659 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8660 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8661 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8662 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8663 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8667 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8668 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8669 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8670 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8678 Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8679 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8684 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8685 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8686 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8687 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8688 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8689 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8690 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8691 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8692 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8693 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8694 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8695 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8696 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8697 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8698 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8699 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8700 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8701 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8702 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8703 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views License Plate Lamp, Left License Plate Lamp, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8704 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8705 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8710 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8711 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8712 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8713 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8714 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8715 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8716 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8717 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8718 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8719 Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8720 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8721 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8722 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8723 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8724 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8725 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8726 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8727 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8728 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8729 Marker Lamp: Connector Views Side Lamp, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8730 Side Lamp, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8731 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8732 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8733 Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8734 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8735 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Side Lamp (Escape) Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8736 Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8741 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8742 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8743 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8744 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8745 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8746 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8747 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8748 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8749 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8750 Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8751 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8752 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8753 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8754 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8755 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8756 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8757 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8758 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8759 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8760 Parking Lamp: Connector Views Park/Turn Lamp, Left Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8761 Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8762 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8763 Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8764 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8765 Park/Turn Lamp, Right Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8766 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8767 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8768 Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8769 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Parking Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Inspection and Verification Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: - Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8772 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus. - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Principles of Operation NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage signals on multiple circuits to the headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal circuits is routed to ground. If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch are active (routed to ground) for 5 seconds, the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off (or 10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch input if the ignition switch was already off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy depending on the multiple inputs received. Based on the multiple inputs received, the autolamps, the headlamps and/or parking lamps are turned on. If either situation occurs, the SJB cannot be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch. When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the parking lamps, the SJB energizes the parking lamp relay, which supplies voltage to the exterior lamps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8773 Parking Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8774 Parking Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) energizes the parking lamp relay (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the rear and front parking lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Bulb holder - SJB PINPOINT TEST P: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- P1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - Ignition OFF. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Are all the parking lamps inoperative? Yes VERIFY the SJB fuse 22 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to P6. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number No If all the front parking lamps are inoperative, GO to P2. If all the rear parking and license plate lamps are inoperative, GO to P3. For all others, GO to P4. ------------------------------------------------- P2 BYPASS THE SJB (FRONT LAMPS) - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Disconnect: SJB C2280e. - Connect a fused jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280e-6, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8775 - Ignition ON. - Do the front parking lamps illuminate? Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6. No REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- P3 BYPASS THE SJB (REAR LAMPS) - Disconnect: SJB C2280d. - Connect a fused jumper wire between the positive battery terminal and the SJB C2280d-20, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8776 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8781 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8782 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Interior Lighting Module: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8786 Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8787 Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Module Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8792 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8793 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8796 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8797 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8798 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8799 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8800 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8806 Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8809 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8810 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Light Sensor Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8814 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8815 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Reversing Lamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8819 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8820 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Typical BPP Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8823 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS Brake Pressure Switch The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8824 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Stoplamp Switch Removal and Installation NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur. 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8828 Door Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8829 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8833 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8836 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8837 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8838 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8839 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8840 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8841 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8845 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8846 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8847 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8848 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Interior Light Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8855 Interior Light Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8856 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8857 Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Lighting Switch Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transaxle 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Vehicles with an automatic transaxle 3. Remove the selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transaxle 4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring. All vehicles 5. Remove the floor console storage bin. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8861 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8862 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8863 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8864 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8873 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8874 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8875 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8876 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8877 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8878 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8879 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8880 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8881 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8882 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8883 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8884 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8885 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8886 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8887 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8888 Tail Lamp: Connector Views Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8889 Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8890 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8891 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8892 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8893 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8898 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8899 Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8901 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8902 Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8903 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8904 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8905 Symbols (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8906 Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8907 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Special Tools Used With Diagnostics Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation Trailer Lamps Principles of Operation The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification Trailer Lamps Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8921 Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Trailer Lamps Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8922 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through a dedicated ground circuit. This circuit is the shared ground for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Y: ALL THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings. Refer to Battery. ------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable. - Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and ground. - Is the resistance less than 5 ohms? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8923 Normal Operation The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP IS INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE THROUGH THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to Z2. ------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay. - Substitute a know good relay. - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8924 - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3. ------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY COIL - While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to Z4. No REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8925 Yes GO to Z5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY USING THE RELAY GROUND - For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8926 tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. No GO to AA2. ------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay. - Substitute a known good relay. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system for normal operation. No REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3. ------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL - Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), BJB face side and ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8927 - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA4. No REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and ground. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes GO to AA5. No VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number ------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL USING THE RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT - Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side. - Is the voltage greater than 10 volts? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8928 No REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Trailer Lamps Pinpoint Tests Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Lamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector. ------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8929 GO to AB2. No The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility. ------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY - Ignition OFF. - Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay. - Ignition ON. - Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows: - Is any voltage present? Yes REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn) or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation. No INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation. ------------------------------------------------- Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8934 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8935 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8938 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8939 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8940 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8941 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8942 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Side Lamp (Escape) Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8948 Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8952 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8953 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8954 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8955 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 8960 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 8961 Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Vanity Mirror Lamp, Right Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 8962 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8968 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8969 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8974 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8975 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8981 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8982 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8983 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8986 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8987 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8988 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8989 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8990 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8991 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8994 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8995 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8996 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8997 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8998 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8999 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9012 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9013 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9014 Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9017 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9018 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9019 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9020 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9021 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9022 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9025 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9026 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9027 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9028 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9029 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9030 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Removal and Installation NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9041 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9042 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 9047 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9053 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9054 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 9059 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9062 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front Door Glass Top Run - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body Liftgate Window Glass Breakage Liftgate Window Glass: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage TSB 11-2-9 02/07/11 BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010 FORD: 2010-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are present. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage. a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure. b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms. a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7842006 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage TSB 11-2-9 02/07/11 BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010 FORD: 2010-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are present. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage. a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure. b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms. a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7842006 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9076 Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Liftgate Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Glass - Rear Quarter Removal 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the pinch weld area. - Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air. 3. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when cutting. 4. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise damage the pinch weld during glass Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9080 removal. NOTE: Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass. 5. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation 1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. 2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer and urethane adhesive. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld. 3. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign material or water that may have entered during glass removal. 4. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. 5. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass with glass cleaner. 6. NOTICE: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of the window assembly. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure. If installing a new rear window glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9081 8. NOTE: The rear quarter glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane adhesive. NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins on the glass surface. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear quarter window glass to specification, making sure there are no gaps in the bead. 9. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane adhesive manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTICE: Before positioning the rear quarter window glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond. Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window glass. 12. Install the headliner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9091 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9092 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9098 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9099 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear Door Glass Top Run - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 9102 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9108 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door Window Regulator - Front Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9109 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9114 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door Window Regulator - Rear Door Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield to the inner door. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9115 - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Windshield: Procedures Glass Reseal - Windshield 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 6. Remove the cowl panel grille. 7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. NOTE: Make sure there are no gaps in the urethane adhesive bead. Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive. - Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle. - Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle. 10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Position the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. 14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9120 15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9121 Windshield: Removal and Replacement Windshield Glass Removal 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9122 - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. For additional information, refer to Mirrors. 5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Remove the cowl panel grille. 8. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the windshield pinch weld area. - Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air. 9. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when cutting. 10. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise damage the pinch weld during glass removal. NOTE: Insert the blade into the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool so that the flat side is against the glass. This will leave the entire urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld and allow a dry fit of the replacement windshield glass. Insert the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool at the upper center of the windshield glass and work toward the bottom corners. 11. Using The Pumper, distance the windshield glass from the body. 12. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9123 13. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation 1. Dry-fit the new windshield glass on the existing urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. - Position the windshield glass on the pinch weld. - Center the windshield glass in the opening. - Adjust the windshield glass stop blocks (if equipped) as needed for best fit. - Make alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil (preferably at the windshield glass stop blocks if equipped) on the windshield glass and the body. 2. After the dry-fit alignment, remove the glass from the windshield opening and place on a stable work surface with the interior side of the glass facing up. 3. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld, glass primer and urethane adhesive. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld. 4. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free, compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign material or water that may have entered during windshield removal. 5. If reinstalling the same windshield glass, remove the windshield moulding and remaining urethane adhesive from the glass leaving a thin layer to bond with the new urethane adhesive bead. 6. Clean the inside of the new windshield glass with glass cleaner. 7. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure. If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: The windshield glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane adhesive. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld, starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center, make sure there are no gaps in the bead. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9124 10. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane adhesive manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTICE: Before positioning the windshield glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond. Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 11. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 12. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield glass. 13. Install the cowl panel grille. 14. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 15. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. 16. Install the interior rear view mirror. For additional information, refer to Mirrors. 17. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 18. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 19. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9144 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9145 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9146 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9147 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9148 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9152 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9153 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9154 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9155 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9156 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9157 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Repair NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking, a new washer hose must be installed. 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9164 Windshield Washer Motor: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9165 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump Washer Pump Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See: Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair. 5. NOTICE: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet. Remove the washer pump. 6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9170 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair C-Lock Coupler C-Lock Coupler Disconnect NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the C-lock coupler. NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler. 1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from rotating internally. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. 2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the o-ring. Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting. 3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and will prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position. Connect 1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position. 2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler. NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position. Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9171 3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9172 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir Washer Pump and Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See: Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow this instruction may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > C-Lock Coupler Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair C-Lock Coupler C-Lock Coupler Disconnect NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the C-lock coupler. NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler. 1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from rotating internally. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. 2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the o-ring. Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting. 3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and will prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position. Connect 1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position. 2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler. NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position. Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > C-Lock Coupler > Page 9177 3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > C-Lock Coupler > Page 9178 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir Washer Pump and Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See: Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow this instruction may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9192 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair C-Lock Coupler Disconnect NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the C-lock coupler. NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler. 1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from rotating internally. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. 2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the o-ring. Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting. 3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and will prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position. Connect 1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position. 2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler. NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position. Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler. 3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9196 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9197 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9198 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9199 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9200 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9201 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from returning to the fully parked position. NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms. If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the correct locations. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 9206 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 2. NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9209 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. For additional information, refer to Wiper Motor - Windshield See: Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper Motor - Windshield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9210 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover. 2. Remove the pivot arm nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in). 3. NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms. Remove the wiper pivot arm. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade - Rear Removal NOTICE: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm or the wiper arm heel. NOTICE: Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass. 1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the arm to its maximum angle. 2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint. 3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm. Installation 1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Locations Windshield Wiper Motor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 9218 Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Wiper Motor Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Diagrams Windshield Wiper Motor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 9221 Wiper Motor: Diagrams Rear Wiper Motor Assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor - Windshield Removal and Installation NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed. 1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft. 2. NOTICE: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm is removed, the wiper arms may not park in the correct location. Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor. - To install, tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 9224 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window Wiper Motor - Rear Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm Rear. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. - To install, hand-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Open the liftgate window. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel. 6. Remove the rear wiper motor. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. Remove the rear window wiper motor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9228 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9229 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9230 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9231 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9232